Mame Ne ne Melitta MO Ty eters Oh es ee a ‘ a ' 7 ans 3 : a = \ \ t ~ ag a Soe THE H Cr ONCRARY SECRETARIES. 56 3 OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN, = ss re + “ oe ag BLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY. Toes ISSUED AS A © OMPLETE VOLUME, MAY, 1929. ae CONTENTS. VOLUME LXII. Art, I1.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By Professor J. Dougnas Stewart, B.V.Sc., M.R.C.V,S.. a aes Art. II.—The Chemistry of Western Astoteatan Sandalwaad Oil. = Part I. By A. R. Penrotp, F.A.C.1., F.C.S. “_ Anes ust 22nd, 1928.) .... Arr. IlI.—The Occurrence of a ones of capes ‘a Ecce dives, as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential Oils. Part II. (With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method for estimation of Cineol). By A. R.-Penroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S., and F, R. Morrison, A.A.C.I., F.C.S. (Issued July 4th. 1928.) -. . _ Art. IV.—Some Ra hata: on es Woodiness or Bullet Dies: of Passion Fruit. By R. J. Nopuz, Ph.D., M.Se. [With Plates [- IV. | (Giewed October 29th, 1928.)... oes Arr. V.— Brown Rot of Fruits, and Associated Diseases, in Aus- tralia. Part I. History of the Diseases and Determination - of the Causal Organisms. By T. H. Harrison, B.Sc.Agr, [With Plates V - IX and one oe figure.) Tssued October - 29th, 1928.)... ive PAGE 60 ~ 712 79 99 Ary, VI.—Acacia Seedlings, Part XIII, By RB. HL ins aer C.B.E.. F.LS., Bee Plates X - XIII. J Coates November 7th, 1928.) .. s Art, VII.—The Geslony of Port Se ckuae Past L Phys and General Geology. By C. A. Sussmitcu, F.G.S., and Wm. Clark. PartIl. Petrography. ByC. A. SussMILoH, F.G.S., and W. A. Grea. [With Plates XIV XVI and two text figures.] (Issued November 29th, 1928.) 2 Art. VIII.—The Outbreak of Springs in Autumn. By R, H. CamBaae, C.B.E., F.L.S. . (Issued December 5th, 1928.) Art. [X.—Description of Three New Species of Eucalyptus aay: One Acacia. By W. F. BLAKELY. oe Plates 1 (Issued Detobar 3rd, 1928.) x Art. X.—The Chemistry of the Exudation coe Sin Wood of Pai taspodon Motleyi. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S., and F. R. Morrison, A.A.C. L., F.C.S. Cane? January 30th, 1929.) Fy ae me ee Art. XI.—The Essential Oil foes a Roisdin in the Pinwites Section from Fraser Island. 7 %y A. R. Punronp. F.A.C.I., F.C.S. (Issued February 7th34.529.) .. oa Art. XII.—An Examination of Defective Gecnon: (Bacudebaiee Taxifolia). By M. B. Wxtcu, B.Se., A.I.C. a. Plates XXI-XXIII.} (Issued February 7th, 1929) . Art. XIII.—On the Probable Tertiary Age of Certain ee South Wales Sedentary Soils. By W. R. Browne, D.Sc. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) _... ire oe wae ee va 152 168 192 _ 201 218 225 235 251 POUR N AL AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1925 (INCORPORATED 1881.) ied: 1 xo: EDITED BY THE HONORARY SECRETARIES. THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FORK THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN. SYDNEY: PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY. ISSUED AS A COMPLETE YOLUME, MAY, 1929, i nad i snl te 1 \ % / ke tM ‘ns han Phat ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART, ART, ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. CONTENTS. VOLUME LXIl. I.— PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By Professor J. Dovuaguas STEWART, B.V.Sc., M.R.C.V.S. Hg eae II.—The Chemistry of Western Aeaee an eee Oil. Part I. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.1., F.C.S. Moers Aug- ust 22nd, 1928.) : III.—The Occurrence of a ae of varieties ‘of acai yutas dives, as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential Oils. Part II. (With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method for estimation of Cineol). By A. R. Penrouo, F.A.C.I., F.C.S., and F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.C.8. (Issued Tuly 4th, 1928.) . - IV.—Some Bos « on ar Woodiness or Bullet ie of Passion Fruit. By R. J. Nopun, Ph.D., M.Sc. [With Plates [-IV.| (Issued October 29th, 1928.)... fea V.— Brown Rot of Fruits, and Associated Diseases, in Aus- traha. Part I. History of the Diseases and Determination of the Causal Organisms. By T’. H. Harrison, B.Sc. Agr. [With Plates V-IX and one teat figure. Issued October 29th, 1928.)... VI.—Acacia Seedlings, Bart XIII. Be R. ce chee C.B.E.. F.LS., De Plates X - pan Snes November 7th, 1928.) .. VII.—The cece of Port sésnicne Part IU eee and General Geology. By C. A. SussminicH, F.G.S., and Wm. Clark. Part II. Petrography. ByC.A. SussMILcH, F.G.S., and W. A. Greig. [With Plates XIV - XVI and two text figures. ] (Issued November 29th, 1928.) VIII.—The Outbreak of Springs in Autumn. By R. H. CamBaa@e, C.B.E., F.L.8. (Issued December 5th, 1928.) ... IX.—Description of Three New Species of Eucalyptus and One Acacia. By W. F. BLAKELY. ee Plates see (Issued October 8rd, 1928.) X.—The Chemistry of the Exudation it tie Wood of Pen- taspodon Motleyi. By A. R. Penroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S., and F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.I., F.C.S. a January 30th, 1929.) XI.—The Tecate Oil es a roe in fe Panne Section from Fraser Island. By A. R. Penroup. F.A.C.I, F.C.S. (Issued February 7th, i929.) .. : oe XII.—An Examination of Defective Oresn (peaseinga Taxifolia). By M. B. Weucn, B.Sc., A.C. [With Plates XXI-XXIII.} (Issued February 7th, 1929) ... is eh XIII.—On the Probable Tertiary Age of Certain New South Wales Sedentary Soils. By W. R. Browns, D.Sc. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) ae iS: oa as ee PAGE 60 72 79 99 152 218 225 235 251 (iv.) Pace Art. XIV.—The Essential Oil of a new species of Anemone leaf Boronia, Rich in Ocimene. By A. BR. Panroup, F.A.C.L, F.C.S. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) w. 2638 Art. XV.—On some Aspects of Differential Erosion. By W.R. Browne, D.Sc. ee ee teat Haute se lag aga 19th, 1929.)... ; 273 Art. XVI.—Further otee on the Gene Bomiae By B. Ben Os (Issued February 19th, 19239.) is 290 Art. XVII.—Alkalization and other Deuteric prisdennderat in ai Saddleback Trachybasalt at Port Kembla. By W. R. Browne. D.Sc. and H. P. Warrs, F.C.S. [With Plates XXIV, XXV and two ee ae an ei Nopeeee 19th, 1929.) : 303 Art. XVIII.—Notes on some Oxeanints of Tomats Pulp. By G. L. WuInpDRED, (communicated He Gilbert oo (Issued February 19th, 1929.) 341 ArT. X[X.—Notes on some Australian T oar of ane Monimiaceae. By M B. We cu, B.Sce., A.L.C. [With Plates co. (Issued February 19th, 1929. ) ie : 350 Arr. XX.—Note on a Fossil Shrimp from the Hadkoeuney ea stones. By CHARLEL CuiILTON, M.A., D.Sc., M.B., (com- municated by W. S. Dun). Bia Plate en (issued February 19th, 1929.) 366 Art, XXI.—Cyanogenetic Glucosidle in eatin Pinte. By H. Finnemonrg, B.Sc., and C. B. Cox, B.Sc. (Issued March 19th, 1929.).. uae 6c van sire a os | “OO0 ABSTRACT OF ee i,— XXV1, PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION ... XXV1. — XXXI1X. PROCEEDINGS OF 'THE SECTION OF INDUSTRY xi. - xl. PROCEEDINGS Of THE SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCLENCE xlv. —li. Tirte Page, Contents, Novices, PUBLICATIONS, ... sa (i. - vi.) OFFICERS FOR 1928-1929) . (vii.) List or Members, Xe. (ix.) InpDEx To VotumeE LXII. lii. NOTICE. Tue Roya Society of New South Wales originated in 182] as the ‘Philosophical Society of Australasia”; after an interval of inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the ‘¢ Australian Philosophical Society,” by which title it was known until 1856, when the name was changed to the ‘ Philosophical Society of New South Wales”; in 1866, by the sanction of Her Most Gracious Majesty Queen Victoria, it assumed its present title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881. TO AUTHORS. Authors should submit their papers in typescript and in a condition ready for printing. Al! physico-chemical symbols and mathematical formule should be so clearly written that the compositor should find no difficulty in reading the manuscript. Sectional headings and tabular matter should not be underlined. Pen-illustrations accompanying papers should be made with black Indian ink upon smooth white Bristol board. Lettering and numbers should be such that, when the illustration or graph is reduced to 34 inches in width, the lettering will be quite legible. On graphs and text figures any lettering may be lightly inserted in pencil. Microphotographs should be rectangular rather than circular, to obviate too great a reduction. The size of a full page plate in the Journal is 4 x 6} inches, and the general reduction of illustrations to this limit should be considered by authors. When drawings, etc., are submitted in a state unsuitable for reproduction, the cost of the preparation of such drawings for the process-block maker must he borne by the author. The cost of colouring plates or maps must also be borne by the author. FORM OF BEQUEST. FE bequeath the sum of £ to the Royat Society oF New SoutH WaAtzgs, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881, and I declare that the receipt of the Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid within calendar months after my decease, without any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be lawfully applied for that purpose. [Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of New South Wales by Legacies, are recommended to instruct their Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest. | PUBLICATIONS. ) The following publications of the Society, if in print, can be obtained at the Society’s House in Elizabeth-street:— Transactions of the Philosophical] Society, N.S. W., 1862-5, pp. 374, out of print. Vols. I—x1 Transactions of the Royal Society, N.S. W., 1867—1877, 99 “ xu Journal and Proceedings 9 re 1878, ,, 324, price 10s.6d. ” XII ” 29 ” ” 99 1879, 99 255, or) 5 XIV os ae <3 ‘5 es 1880, ,, 391, Es ” XV ey ” ” ” ” 1881, 99 440, 9 Ss XVI =p 53 3 4 a 1882, ,, 327, 2 9 XVII ” ” ” +9 9 1883, 9 324, ” ” XVIII ” ” ” ” ” 1884, 9 224, 99 99 XIX ” 99 ” 29 99 1885, 99 240, 99 99 XX 39 9 99 ” 99 1886, 99 396, 99 - XXI _ 3 a5 99 » 1887, ,, 296, » 99 XXIT 29 9 19 9 2? 1888, 93 390. ”” 9 XXIII 9 ” ” ” oe) 1889, 29 534, 9 on) XXIV 99 9 7) ” 9 1890, +) 290, ” ” XXV ” ” ” 29 +) 1391, 7) 348, 9 99 XXVI ” oo) ” 9 ”9 1892, 99 426, ” ” XXVII 99 ” 39 ” ” 1893, oe) 530, 99 ” XXVIII o) 7) ” oF) ” 1894, 99 368, 9 9 XXIX 9 ” 9 ” ” 1895, ” 600, ” ” XXX 99 ” ” ” 99 1896, 9 568, 9 99 XXXI 99 29 9 ” ”9 1897, 29 626, ” ” XXXII ” oe) ” ” +) 1898, ” 476, ”9 ” XXXII ” ” ” +) ” 1899, ”9 400, 99 9% XXXIV ” ye ” 99 9 1500, 9 484, 39 ” XXXV ” 9 99 99 99 1901, 9 581, 39 ” XXXVI ” ” ” ” ” 1902, ” 531, ” 2 XXXVIT 9 ” ” ” ” 1903, 9 663, 9° », XXXVITT 29 9 ” ” 29 1904, ) 604, 2” ” XXXIX oe) ” ” mh) ee) 1905, 99 274, ye) 9 XL 29 : ” ” 29 39 1906, oe) 368, 99 29 XLI 99 ” ” 9 99 1907, 99 377, 99 ee) XLII 2? 99 9 oH) oe) 1908, 99 593, ”9 99 XLIII +) 99 ” 99 ” 1909, oD) 466, 9 ” XLIV 9 oy) oo) ” Ly) 1910, 3” 719, 9 ”9 XLV 79 9 ” 9 ” 1911, 29 611, 99 oe) XLVI ye) 99 oe) oe) oy) 1912, 99 275, 9 99 XLVI 99 ” 9 ” 99 1918, 99 318, om) 9 XLVITI 99 99 ” 99 99 1914, 99 584, 9 ” XLIX 39 99 ” 7) 29 1915, 9 587, 9 ” L ey) oF) ” ” 29 1916, 29 362, oy) 99 LI 39 39 99 99 99 1917, 39 786, 99 9 LII ” oo) 9 9 ) 1918, 99 624, ye) 99 LIII 99 oe) 99 oe) 9 1919, oe) 414, 99 ” LIV 99 9 99 » or) 1920, ,, 312, price £1 ls. 9 LV 99 ” oI) ” 99 1921, 99 418, 99 9) LVI 99 99 99 99 99 1922, bP) 372, 99 ” LVII 99 99 99 ” 99 1928, oy) 421, 99 ” LVIII 29 9 ) ” oP) 1924, oy) 366, ”9 ” LIX ” 99 oe) oo) ”” 1925, ” 46S, ” 99 LX 9 99 7 3 ” 1926, ” 470, 99 9° LXI 99 be] 9 9 99 1927, 99 492, 99 ? LXII 29 bh 79 99 ae 1928, 99 458, 99 Aopal Society of Sew Sonth ales Green Ee Es ys 2 @Oike “LO2S8-Lo2°- Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONOURABLE JOHN LAWRENCE, BARON STONEHAVEN, P.c., G.c.M.a4., D.s.0. Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia. Vice-Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR DUDLEY RAWSON STRATFORD de CHATR, k.c.B., M.V.O. Governor of the State of New South Wales. President: W. POOLE, me, M.mst.c.£., M.1.’M.M., etc, Vice-Presidents: R. H. CAMBAGE, c.3.u., F.L.S.* Prof. R. D. WATT, m.a., B.sc. C. ANDERSON, .a., D.Sc. Prof. J. DOUGLAS STEWART, B.V.Se., M.R.C.V.S. Hon. Treasurer: Prof. H. G. CHAPMAN, m.p. Hon. Secretaries: Prof. O. U. VONWILLER, | C. A. SUSSMILCH, BSc., F.Inst.P, ’ F.G.S., F.S.T.C., etc. Members of Council: EK. C. ANDREWS, B.a., F.G@.s. Prof. C. KE. FAWSITT, p.sc., ph.v. G. H. BRIGGS, B.sc., php. G. A. JULIUS, B.sc., w.8.,.M-1.Mec.E. R. W. CHALLINOR, F.1.¢., F.c.s. J. NANGLE, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S. EK. CHEEL. R. J. NOBLE, m.se:, Bsc. Agr. Ph.D. Prof. L. A. COTTON, m.a., D.Sc. Rev. E. F. PIGOT, sJ., B.a., M.B *Deceased 28th Noyember, 1928 ihe i he r 4 re ome Png aU Ns hs Nae « fist OF THE MEMBERS OF THE AMopal Society of Act South Wales. eee P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s Journal. The numerals indicate the number of such contributions. £ Life Members. Elected, 1908 1904 1898 1905 1909 1915 1919 1923 1878 1924 1919 1894 1894 1926 1919 1925 1908 1895 1909 1926 1923 1919 1923 Ps Bo P 27 P2 | Abbott, George Henry, B.A., M.B.,Ch.M., 185 Macquarie-street; p.v. ‘Cooringa,’ 252 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill. Adams, William John, M.1.Mech.E., 175 Clarence-street. Alexander, Frank Lee, William-street, Granville. Anderson, Charles, u.A., D.Sc. Hdin., Director of the Australian Museum, College-street. (President, 1924.) Vice-President. Andrews, Ernest C., 3B.A., F.G.8.. Hon. Mem. Washington Academy of Sciences, Government Geologist, Department of Mines, Sydney. (President, 1921.) | Armit, Henry William, m.r.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.P. Lond., The Printing House, Seamer-street. Glebe. Aurousseau, Marcel, B.sc., c/o Post Office, Manly. Baccarini, Antonio, Doctor in Chemistry (Florence). Backhouse, His Honour Judge A. P., m.a., ‘ Melita,’ Elizabeth Bay. Bailey, Victor Albert, M.A., D.Phil., F.Inst.P., Assoc.-Professor of Physics in the University of Sydney. Baker, Henry Herbert, 15 Castlereagh-street. Baker, Richard Thomas, The Crescent. Cheltenham. {Balsille, George, ‘ Lauderdale,’ N.E. Valley, Dunedin, N.Z. Bannon, Joseph, Demonstrator in Physics in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘ Dunisla,’ The Crescent, Homebush. Bardsley, John Ralph, ‘The Pines,’ Lea Avenue, Five Dock. Barker-Woden, Lucien, F.R.G.s., Commonwealth Department of Navigation, William Street, Meibourne. Barling, John, u.s., ‘St. Adrians, Raglan-street, Mosman. Barraclough, Sir Henry, K.B.&., B.E., M.M.E., M. Inst. C.E., M.1I. Mech. E., Memb. Soc. Promotion Eng. Education; Memb. Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Dean of the Faculty of Engineering and Professor of Mechanical Engineering in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Marmion,’ Victoria-street, Lewisham. Benson, William Noel, p.sc. Syd., B.A. Cantab., F.a.s., Professor of Geology in the University of Otago, Dunedin, N.Z. en Sydney Ernest, B.sc.agr. 70 Young-street, Annan- ale. Berry, Frederick John, F.c.s., ‘Roseneath,’ 51 Reynolds-street, Neutral Bay. Bettley-Cooke, Hubert Vernon, ‘The Hollies,’ Minter-street, Canterbury. Birks, George Frederick, c/o Potter & Birks, 15 Grosvenor-st. lected. 1916 1920 1915 1913 1923 1905 1888 1893 1917 1926 1920 1922 | 1916 1926 1917 1891 1923 1919 1922 P4 PA P4 Pal P15 P 10 (X.) Birrell, Septimus, cjo Margarine Co., Edinburgh Road, Marrickville. Bishop, Eldred George, 8 Belmont-road, Mosman. Bishop, John, 24 Bond-street. Bishop, Joseph Eldred, Killarney-street. Mosman. Blakely, William Faris, ‘ Myola,’ Florence-street, Hornsby. Blakemore, George Henry, 683 Pitt Street, Sydney. {Blaxland, Walter, F.R.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.p. Lond., ‘ Inglewood,’ Florida Road, Palm Beach, Sydney. Blomfield, Charles E., B.c.e. Melb., ‘ Woombi,’ Kangaroo Camp, Guyra. Bond, Robert Henry, ‘Eastbourne,’ 27 Cremorne-road, Cre- morne Point. Booker, Frederick William, B.sc., ‘Dunkeld,’ Nicho!son-street, Chatswood. Booth, Edgar Harold, M.C., B.Sc., F.Inst.P., Lecturer and Demon- stratorin Physics in the University of Sydney. Bradfield, John Job Crew, D.Sc. Eng., M.E., M. Inst. C.E., M. Inst. E. Aust. Chief Engineer, Metropolitan Railway Construction, Rail- way Department, Sydney. Bragg, James Wood, B.a., c/o Gibson, Battle &Co. Ltd.,Kent-st. Branch, Kenneth James F., 99 North Steyne, Manly. Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., B.Sc, Headmaster Agricultural School, Yanco. Brennand, Henry J. W., B.A., M.D., Chm. Syd., v.D., Surgeon Commander R.A.N. Ret., 223 Macquarie-street; p.r. 73 Milsons Road, Cremorne. Brereton, Ernest Le Gay, B sc., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Chemistry in the University of Sydney. Briggs, George Henry, B.8c., Ph.p., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physics in the University of Sydney. Brough, Patrick, M.a., B.Se, B.Sc, (Agr.) (Glasgow), Lecturer in Botany in the University of Sydney. Brown, Herbert, ‘ Sikoti,’ Alexander-street, Collaroy Beach, Sydney. Brown, James B., St. Andrew’s, Mont Victor Road, East Kew, H. 4, Victoria. Browne, William Rowan, pD.sc., Assistant-Professor of Geology in the University of Sydney. {Burfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., M.B., Ch.M. B.Sc, Syd., ‘Wyom- ing,’ 175 Macquarie-street, Sydney. Buckitt, Arthur Neville St. George, u.B, B.sc., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Sydney. Burrows, George Joseph, B.sc, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Chemistry in the University of Sydney; p.r. Watson-street, Neutral Bay. Calvert, Thomas Copley, Assoc.M.Inst.c.E, Department of Pub- lic Works, Sydney. Cameron, Lindsay Duncan, Hilly-street, Mortlake. Campbell, Alfred W., M.pD., ch.m. Edin., 183 Macquarie-street. Carment, David, r.1.a. Grt. Brit. @ Irel. ¥.F.A., Scot., 4 Whaling Road, North Sydney. Carruthers, Sir Joseph Hector. K.c.M.G., M.1..C., M.a., Syd., LL.D., St. Andrews, ‘Highbury,’ Waverley. lected 1903 1913 1909 1913 1925 ‘1909 1876 1896 1920 1913 1928 ‘1882 1919 ‘1909 1892 1886 1921 1927 ‘1925 1912 ‘1886 1928 1890 A919 1921 1921 1894 (xais) P3) Carslaw, Horatio S., m.a., Se.b., Professor of Mathematics in the University of Sydney. P 3| Challinor, Richard Westman, F.1.c., F.c.s., Lecturer in Chem- istry, Sydney ‘l'echnical College. P 2| Chapman, Henry G., m.p., B.s., Director of Caxcer Research, University of Sydney. Hon. Treasurer. P 16) Cheel, Edwin, Curator National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. P 1| Clark, William E., ‘ Acacia,’ Cambridge-street, Epping. P 20} Cleland, John Burton, m.p., ch.m., Professor of Pathology inthe University of Adelaide. (President 1917.) Codrington, John Frederick, m.r.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.e. Lond, and Edin., ‘Roseneath,’ 8 Wallis-street, Woollahra. P4| Cook, W. E., m.c.e. Melb., M.Inst.,C.E., Burroway-st., Neutral Bay. Cooke, Frederick, c/o Meggitt’s Limited, 26 King-street. P 3] Coombs, F. A., F.c.s., Instructor of Leather Dressing and Tanning, Sydney Technical College; p.r. Bannerman Crescent, Rosebery. Coppleson, Victor Marcus, u.s., Chu ,r.rc.s., 225 Macquarie- street, Sydney. Cornwell, Samuel, J.P., ‘Capanesk,’ Tyagarah, North Coast. Cotton, Frank Stanley, B.sc., Chief Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physiology in the University of Sydney. P 6| Cotton, Leo Arthur, m.a., D.Sc, Professor of Geology in the University of Sydney, P1| Cowdery, George R., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., ‘Glencoe,’ Torrington Road, Strathfield. Crago, W. H., u.n.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.p. Lond., 185 Macquarie-st. tCresswick, John Arthur, 101 Villiers-street, Rockdale. P 1] Currey, Geoffrey Saunders, 13 Princess-avenue, Homebush. Curry, Harris Eric Marshall, c/o M. Barker, Esq., Kincumber, N.S. W. Curtis, Louis Albert, L.s., F.t.s. (N.S.W.), v.p., Room 618, New Government Savings Bank, Castlereagh-street; p.r. No. 1 Mayfair Flats, Macleay-street,; Darlinghurst. P 23) David, Sir Edgeworth, K.B.z., C.M.G., D.S.0, B.A., D.Sc, ¥.R.S., F.G.S., Wollaston Medallist, Emeritus Professor of Geo- logy and Physical Geography in the University of Sydney; p-r. ‘Coringah,’ Sherbroke-road, Hornsby. (President 1895, 1910.) Davidson, Walter Charles, General Manager Clyde Engineer- ing Company, Granville. Dare, Henry Harvey, M.E., M.Inst.C.E, Commissioner, Water Conservation and Irrigation Commission, Union House, George-street. P 2) de Beuzeville, Wilfrid Alex. Watt, Forestry Assessor, Forest Office, Tumut. Delprat, Guillaume Daniel, c.B.z., ‘Keynsham,’ Mandeville Crescent, ‘loorak, Victoria. Denison, Sir Hugh Robert, x.B.z., 701 Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street. Dick, James Adam. o.m.c., B.A. Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.R.C.8. Edin., ‘Catfoss,’ 59 Beluore Road, Randwick. Elected 1906 1913 1928 1908 1924 1924 1923 1919 1924 1918 1916 1908 1896 1887 1921 1910 1909 1922 1927 1923 1920 1888 1879 1920 1905 1904 1925 1918 P3 P'6 P 2 PZ Pay Pil (xii) Dixson, William, ‘ Merridong,’ Gordon Road, Killara. Doherty, William M., F.1c., F.c.s., Second Government: Analyst, ‘ Jesmond,’ George-street, Marrickville. Donegan, Henry Arthur James, A.s.7.c., Chemical Laboratory, Department of Mines, Sydney. Dun, William S., Paleeontologist, Department of Mines, Sydney. (President 1918. ) Dupain, George Zephirin, a.a.c.1., F.c s., Dupain Institute of Physical Education, Manning Building, Pitt and Hay Streets, Sydney, p.r. ‘Symington,’ Parramatta Road, Ashfield. Durham, Joseph, 120 Belmore Road, Randwick. Karl, John Campbell, p.se. Pn.p., Professor of Organic Chem- istry in the University of Sydney. Earp, T'he Hon. George Frederick, ¢.B.n., u.u.c., Australia House, Carrington-street. Eastaugh, Frederick Alldis, a.r.s.m., F.1.c., Assoc. Professor in Chemistry, Assaying and Metallurgy in the University of Sydney. fElliott, Edward, c/o Reckitts’ (Oversea) Ltd., Bourke-street, Redfern. Enright, Walter J., B.a., High-street, West Maitland, N.S.W. Esdaile, Edward William, 42 Hunter-street. Fairfax, Geoffrey E., Hon. tu.p. (Toronto), B.a., S. M. Herald Office, Hunter-street. Faithfull, R. L., u.p., New York, u.R.0.P., u.s.A. Lond., c/o Iceton,,. Faithfull and Maddocks, 25 O’Connell-street. Farnsworth, Henry Gordon, ‘ Rothsay,’ 90 Alt-street, Ashfield. Farrell, John, a.t.c., Syd., Riverina Flats, 265 Palmer-street, Sydney. Fawsitt, Charles Edward, p.sc., Ph,D., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney. (President 1919). Ferguson, Andrew, 9 Martin Place, Sydney. Finnemore, Horace, B.Sce., F.1.C., Lecturer in Pharmacy in the: University of Sydney. Fiaschi, Piero, 0.B.E., mu.p. (Columbia Univ.), p.p.s. (New York): M.R.C.S. (Eng.), L.R.0.P. (Lond.), 178 Phillip-street. Fisk, Ernest Thomas, Wireless House, 47 York-street. Fitzhardinge, His Honour Judge G. H., m.a. ‘Red Hill,” Pennant Hills. {Foreman, Joseph, m.x.c.s. Eng. u.R.c.P. Edin., ‘The Astor,” Macquarie-street. Fortescue, Albert John, ‘Benambra,’ Loftus-street, Arncliffe. Foy, Mark, c/o Hydro Office, 133a Pitt-street, Sydney. Fraser, James, ©.M.G., M.Inst.C.E., Chief Commissioner for Railways, Bridge-street. Friend, Norman Bartlett, 48 Pile-street, Dulwich Hill. Gallagher, James Laurence, m.a. Syd., ‘Akaroa,’ Hllesmere- Avenue, Hunter’s Hill. eer Elected 1926 | 1921 1897 1922 1916 1922 1927 1923 1919 1880 1912 1892 1919 1916 1912 1887 1909 1916 1905 1913 1923 1918 1916 1914 1916 1919 1919 1884 1918 1921 11928 P5 P2 Ps Pl P8 P5 Pt Pl P2 Pi} P2 (xiii. ) Gibson, Alexander James, M.E., M.Inst.c.E., M.I g.Aust., 906 Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street, Sydney. Godfrey, Gordon Hay, m.a.. B.Sc, Lecturer in Physics in the Technical College, Sydney; p.r. 262 Johnston-street, Annandale. Gould, The Hon. Sir Albert John, K.B., v.p., ‘ Eynesbury,’ Edgecliff. Grant, Robert, F.c.s., Department of Public Health, 98 Mac- quarie-street. Green, Victor Herbert, 19 Bligh-street. Greig, William Arthur, Mines Department, Sydney. Gunn, Reginald Montague Cairns, B.Sc., B.Sc.Agr., M.R.C.V.S. Lecturer in Veterinary Auatomy and Surgery in the University of Sydney. Gurney, William Butler, Government Entomologist, Depart- ment of Agriculture, Sydney. Halligan, Gerald H., u.s., F.4.s., Uplands,”’ Station Street. Pymble. Hallmann, E. F., B.sc., 72 John-street, Petersham. Halloran, Henry Ferdinand, t.s., 82 Pitt-street. Hambridge, Frank, Adelaide Steamship Co. Chambers, Bridge- street, Sydney. Hamilton, Arthur Andrew, ‘The Ferns,’ 17 Thomas-st., Ashfield Hamilton, Alexander G., ‘Tanandra,’ Hercules-st., Chatswood. Hamlet, William M., F.1.c., F.c.s., Member of the Society of Public Analysts ; ‘Glendowan,’ Glenbrook, Blue Mountains. B.M.A. Building, 30 Elizabeth-st. (President 1899, 1908). Hammond, Walter L., B.sc., High School, Bathurst. Hardy, Victor Lawson, ‘Tiri Mona,’ 11a Gordon-av., Randwick Harker, George, D.Sc., F.A.c.I., Chamber of Commerce Building, 35 William-street, Melbourne. Harper, Leslie F., r.a.s., Geological Surveyor, Department of Mines, Sydney. Harrison, Travis Henry, Lecturer in Entomology and Botany at the Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Richmond. Hassan. Alex. Richard Roby, c/o W. Angliss & Co. Ppty. Ltd., 64 West Smithfield, London, E.C. Hay Dalrymple-, Richard T., t.s.; 45 Bay-street. Double Bay Hector, Alex. Burnet, ‘‘ Druminard,”’ Greenwich-road, Green- wich. Henderson, James, ‘ Dunsfold,’ Clanalpine-street, Mosman. Henriques, Frederick Lester, 208 Clarence-street. Henry, Max, D5S.0., B.V.Se, M.R.C.V.s., ‘Coram Cottage,’ Essex- street, Epping. Henson, Joshua B., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., 28 Barton-street, May- field, Newcastle. Hindmarsh, Percival, m.a., B.se. (Agr.), Teachers’ College, The University, Sydney; p.r. ‘Lurnea,’ Canberra Avenue, Greenwich. Hindmarsh, William Lloyd, B.v.se, M.R.c.Vv.s., D.v.8., District Veterinary Officer, Glenfield. Hirst, George Walter Cansdell, B.Sc., Chief Mechanical Engi- neer’s Office, Wilson Street, Redfern. Elected, 1916 1924 1901 1905 1920 1919 VSM) 1919 1913 1920 1923 1927 1923 1922 1904 1925 1917 1918 1909 1924 1911 1924 1924 1887 1919 1896 P3 IPs2 P15 P3 (xiv.) Hoggan, Henry James, A.M.1.M.@., A.M.1.E. (Aust.). Manchester Unity Chambers, 160 Castlereagh-street; pr. ‘ Lincluden,” Frederick-street, Rockdale. Holme, Ernest Rudolph, 0.8.u., m.a., Professor of English: Language in the University of Sydney. Holt, Thomas 8., ‘Amalfi,’ Appian Way, Burwood. Hooper, George, J.P., F.1.c. Syd., ‘Mycumbene,’ Nielsen Park,. Vaucluse. Hordern, Anthony, c.B.z., 12 Spring-street, Sydney. Hoskins, Arthur Sidney, Eskroy Park, Bowenfels. Hoskins, Cecil Harold, Windarra, Bowenfels. Houston, Ralph Liddle, No. 1 Lincluden Gardens, Fairfax-rd.,. Double Bay. Hudson, G. Inglis, J.p., r.c.s., ‘Gudvangen,’ Arden-st., Coogee.. Hulle, Edward William, Commonwealth Bank of Australia. Hynes, Harold John, B.sc., (Agr.), Walter and Bliza Hall Agri-- cultural Research Fellow, Biological Branch, Department: of Agriculture, Sydney. Inglis, William Keith, M.D., Ch.M., Lecturer in Pathology in: the University of Sydney; p.r. 34 Wolseley-street,. Drummoyne. Ingram, William Wilson, u.c., M.D., cn.B., 185 Macquarie-st., Sydney. Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, ‘Cambria,’ 106 Bland-street, Ashfield. Jaquet, John Blockley, a.x.s.M., F.G.s., Chief Inspector of Mines,. Department of Mines, Sydney. Jenkins, Charles Adrian, B.£., B.Sc, 2 Ramsgate Avenue, Bondi Beach. Jenkins, Richard Ford, Engineer for Boring, Irrigation Com-: mission, 6 Union-street, Mosman. John, Morgan Jones, M.1I.Mech.&., A.M.1.E.E. Lond., M.1.E. Aust.,. w.1.M. Aust., Atlas Building, 8 Spring-street; p.r. Olphert. Avenue, Vaucluse. Johnston, ''homas Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., Professor of Zoology in the University of Adelaide. Jones, Leo Joseph, Geological Surveyor, Department of Mines,. Sydney. Julius, George A., Sir, Kt., B.8c., M.E., M.I.Mech.E., Culwulla: Chambers, Castlereagh-street, Sydney. Kenner, James, Ph. D., D.Sc, F.R.S., Professor of Technological, Chemistry in the University of Manchester. Kenny, Edward Joseph, Field Assistant, Department of Mines, Sydney; p.r. 45 Robert-street, Marrickville. Kent, Harry C., M.A., F.R.1.B.A., Dibbs’ Chambers, 58 Pitt-st.. Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, M.D., Ch.M., D.Sc., Bulladelah,,. New South Wales. King, Kelso, 14 Martin Place. Elected 1923 1920 1919 1877 1924: 1920 1916 1909 1883 1906 1924 1927 | 1884 1923 1921 1903 1919 1906 1891 1880 1922 1927 1916 1909 1924, 1880 P2 P9 (xv.) Kinghorn, James Roy, Australian Museum, Sydney. Kirchner, William John, B.sc., “ Wanawong,” ‘I hornleigh-road,, Beecroft. | Kirk, Robert Newby, 25 O’Connell-street Knox, Edward W., ‘Rona,’ Bellevue Hill, Double Bay. Leech, ‘Thomas David James, B.sc., Syd., ‘Orontes,’ Clarke-st., Granville. Le Souef, Albert Sherbourne, Taronga Park, Mosman. L’Estrange, Walter William, 7 Church-street, Ashfield. Leverrier, Frank, B.A., B.Sc, K.c., Wentworth Road, Vaucluse. “ingen, J. T., m.a. Cantab., x.c., e/¢c Union Club, Bligh-st. Loney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M.Am.Soc.Refr.E., Equitable Building, George-street. Love, David Horace, Beauchamp Avenue, Chatswood. Love, William Henry, Bsc, ‘‘Lumeah,’ 9 Miller-street, Haberfield. MacCormick, Sir Alexander, K.c.M.G., M.D., C.M. Hdin., M.R.C.S. Eng., 185 Macquarie-street. Mackay, Iven Giffard. c.u.a., D.s.o., B.A., Student Adviser and Secretary of Appointments Board, The University, Svdney. McDonald, Alexander Hugh Earle, Superintendent of Agri- culture, Department of Agriculture, Sydney. McDonald, Robert, J.p., u.s., Pastoral Chambers, O’Connell-st; p.r. ‘ Lowlands,’ William-street, Double Bay. McGeachie, Duncan, M.1.M.E,, M.1.E, (Aust.), u.1.m.m. (Aust.), ‘Craig Royston,’ Toronto, Lake Macquarie. McIntosh, Arthur Marshall, ‘Moy Lodge,’ Hill-st., Roseville. McKay, R. T., L.S., M.Inst.C.E., Commissioner, Sydney Harbour Trust, Circular Quay. McKinney, Hugh Giffin, m.z., Roy. Univ. Irel., M.Inst.C.E., Sydney Safe Deposit, Paling’s Buildings, Ash-street. McLuckie, John, M.a.; B.sc., (Glasgow), D.Sc.. (Syd.), Assistant- Professor of Botany in the University of Sydney. McMaster, Frederick Duncan, ‘“‘ Dalkeith,’’ Cassilis. McQuiggin, Harold G., u.B., ch.m., B.Sc, Lecturer and Demon- strator in Physiology in the University of Sydney; p.r.. ‘ Berolyn,’ Beaufort-street, Croydon. Madsen, John Percival Vissing, D.Sc., B.E., Professor of Elec- trical Engineering in the University of Sydney. Mance, Frederick Stapleton. Under Secretary for Mines, Mines. Department, Sydney; p.r. ‘ Binbah,’ Lucretia Avenue, Longueville. P 1| Manfred, Edmund C., Montague-street, Goulburn. ‘Elected. 1920 1920 1908 1914 1926 1912 1922 1928 1926 1879 1922 1924 1924, 1879 1915 1923 1893 1917 1924 1891 1920 Pl P13 P2 P4 P2 (xvi.) Mann, Cecil William. Mann, James Elliott Furneaux, Barrister at Law, c/o H. Southerden, Esq.. Box 1646 J.J., G.P.O., Sydney. Marshall, Frank, c.m.c., B.D.s., 151 Macquarie-street. Martin, A. H., Technical College, Sydney. Mathews, Hamilton Bartlett, B.a. Syd., Surveyor General of N.S.W., Department of Lands, Sydney. Meldrum, Henry John, B.a., 8.sc. ‘ Craig Roy,’ Sydney Road, Manly. Mills, Arthur Edward, m.B., cn.m., Dean of the Faculty of Medicine, Professor,of Medicine in the University of Sydney ; p.r. 143 Macquarie-street. Mitchell, Louis Ivan, Ph.D., Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Pyrmont. : Mitchell, Ernest Marklow, 106 Harrow Road, Rockdale Moore, Frederick H., Union Club, Sydney. Morrison, Frank Richard, 4.a.c.1., F.c.s., Assistant Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney; p.r. Brae-st., Waverley. Morrison, Malcolm, Department of Mines, Sydney. Mullens, Arthur Launcelot, 65 Woodside Avenue, Strathfield. Mullins, John Lane, u.t.c., M.a. Syd., ‘ Killountan,’ Double Bay. Murphy, R. K., Dr. Ing., Chem. Eng., Lecturer in Chemistry Technical College, Sydney. Murray, Jack Keith, B.A., B.sc. (Agr.), Principal, Queensland Agricultural College, Gatton, Queensland. Nangle, James, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S., Superintendent of Technical Education, The ‘Technical College, Sydney; Government Astronomer, The Observatory, Sydney. (President 1920., Vice-President. Nash, Norman C., ‘Ruanora,’ King’s Road, Vaucluse. Nickoll, Harvey, L.8.c.P., L.R.C.s., Barham, via Mudgee, N.S.W. tNoble, Edward George, L.s., 8 Louisa Road, Balmain. Noble, Robert Jackson, M.Se., B.Sc.Agr., Ph.D., Agricultural Museum, George-street, North; p.r. ‘ Lyndon,’ Carrington- | street, Homebush. f{Old, Richard, ‘ Waverton,’ Bay Road, North Sydney. Olding, George Henry, *‘ Werriwee,” Wright's Road, Drum- moyne. Ollé, A. D., F.c.s., ‘Kareema,’ Charlotte-street, Ashfield. Ormsby, Irwin, ‘Caleula,’ Allison Road, Randwick. Osborn, A. F., Assoc.M.Inst.C.E., Water Supply Branch, Sydney; p.r. ‘ Waugoola,’ Fern-street. Pymble. Osborn, Theodore George Bentley, D.sc., F.LS., Professor of Botany in the University of Sydney. Osborne, George Davenport, D.sc. Lecturer and Demonstrator in Geology in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Belle-Vue,’ Kembla-st., Arncliffe. ‘Elected 1880 | 1921 1928 1920 1909 1879 1881 1919 1917 1896 1921 1918 1927 1918 1893 1927 1922 1919 1909 1928 1920 1924 1928 11884 1895 1927 (1925 1907 (xvil.) | Palmer, Joseph, 96 Pitt-st.; p.r. Kenneth-st., Willoughby. Parkes, Varney, Conjola, South Coast. Parsons, Stanley William Enos, Analyst and Inspector, N.S.W. Explosive Department, p.r. Shepherd Road, Artar- mon. P 49| Penfold, Arthur Ramon, F.c.s., Curator and Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Harris-street, Ultimo. P 2| Pigot, Rev. Edward F., s.J., B.A., M.B. Dub., Director of the Seismological Observatory, St. Ignatius’College, Riverview. P 8| Pittman, Edward F., Assoc.R.S.M. L.S., ‘The Oaks,’ Park-street, South Yarra, Melbourne. Poate, Frederick, F.R.A.S., L.S., ‘ Clanfield,’ 50 Penkivil-street, Bondi. Poate, Hugh Raymond Guy, m.B., ch. M. Syd., F.R.C.8. Eng., L.R.c.P. Lond., 225 Macquarie-street. Poole, William, m.z., (Civil, Min. and Met.) Syd., mM. Inst. C.E., M.I.M.M., M.I.E., Aust., M.Am.1.M.E., M. Aust. I. M.M., L.S., 906 Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street. President. (Member from 1891 to 1904.) Pope, Roland James, B.a., Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.R.CS.. EHdin., 185 Macquarie-street. P2| Powell, Charles Wilfrid Roberts, a.1.c., c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., O’Connell-street. ‘Powell, John, 17 Thurlow-street, Redfern. Price, William Lindsay, B.E.,B.Sc.,“ Malola,” Smith-road, Artarmon. Priestley, Henry, mM.D., ch. M., B.Sc, Associate-Professor of Physiology in the University of Sydney. Purser, Cecil, B.A., M.B., Chm. Syd., 185 Macquarie-street. Radcliffe-Brown, Alfred Reginald, m.a., Cantab., m.a., Adel., F.R.A.I., Cantab., Professor of Anthropology in the Uni- versity of Sydney. Raggatt, Harold George, B.sc., “‘ Meru,” Epping-av., Epping. P 3| Ranclaud, Archibald Boscawen Boyd, B.sc., B.E., Lecturer in Physics, Teachers’ College, The University, Sydney. Reid, David, ‘ Holmsdale,’ Pymble. Reidy, Eugene Nicholas, a.s.t.c., Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney. Richardson, John James, A.M.1.E.E. Lond., ‘ Kurrawyba,’ Upper Spit Road, Mosman. Robertson, James R. M., m.p., C.M., F.R.G.S., F.G.S., ‘Vanduara,’ Ellamang Avenue, Kirribilli. Ross, Allan Clunies, B.Sc, 15 Castlereagh-street, Sydney. (Member from 1915 to 1924.) P 1| Ross, Chisholm, u.p. Syd., M.B., Ch.M., Hdin., 225 Macquarie-st. Ross, Herbert E., Equitable Building, George-street. Ross, Ian Clunies, D.V.Sce., ‘‘ Lorne,” The Grove, Woollahra. Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, Technological Museum, Sydney. Ryder, Charles Dudley, D. Eng. (Vienna), Assoc.I.R.8.M,. (L.), Ass.A.C.1., F.C.8., (L.j, Public Analyst (by appoint.), 59 Patterson-street; Concord. Elected 1922 | 1926 1920 1920 TOUS 1923 1918 1924 1927 1917 1900 1922 1919 1921 1917 1916 1921 1914 1920 1913 1900 1909 1916 1927 1919 1920 1918 1901 1919 1920 Pil Pl Pt Pt Po (xviii. ) Sandy, Harold Arthur Montague, 326 George-street. Saunderson, William, B.Sc. Dun,, F.C.S., Licentiate, College of- Preceptors England, c/o Imperial Service Club, 12 O’Con- nell-street, Sydnev. Sawyer, Basil, B.s., ‘Birri Birra,’ The Crescent, Vaucluse. Scammell, Rupert Boswood, B.sc., Syd., 18 Middle Head Road, Mosman. Sear, Walter George Lane, c/o J. Kitchen & Sons, Ingles-st.,. Port Melbourne. Seddon, Herbert Robert, p.v.sc,, Director, Veterinary Research- Station, Glenfield. Sevier, Harry Brown, c/o Lewis Berger and Sons (Aust.) Ltd., Cathcart House, Castlereagh-street. Shelton, James Peel, msc, B.Sc, Agr., Department of Agri-- culture, Canberra. . Shearsby, Alfred James, 152 Bland-street, Haberfield. Sibley, Samuel Edward, Mount-street, Coogee. tSimpson, R.C., Lecturer in Electrical Engineering, Technical College, Sydney. Smith, Thomas Hodge, Australian Museum, Sydney. Southee, Ethelbert Ambrook, 0.B.8., M.A., B.Sc, Principal, Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Richmond, N.S.W. Spencer-Watts, Arthur, ‘Araboonoo,’ Glebe-street, Randwick. Spruson, Wilfred Joseph, Daily Telegraph Building, King-st.. Stephen, Alfred Ernest, F.c.s., Box 1197 H.H.G.P.O., Sydney... Stephen, Henry Montague, B.a., LL.B., c/o Messrs. Maxwell and Boyd, 17 O’Connell-street. Stephens, Frederick G. N., F.R.c.s., M.B., Ch.M., Captain Piper’s Koad and New South Head Road, Vaucluse. Stephens, John Gower, m.B., Royal Prince Alfred Hospital, Camperdown. Stewart, Alex. Hay, B.z., ‘ Yunah,’ 22 Murray-street, Croydon Stewart, J. Douglas, B.v.sc., M.R.c.V.s., Professor of Veterinary Science in the University of Sydney ; p.r. ‘ Berelle,’ Home- bush Road, Strathfield. (President 1927.) Vice-President... Stokes, Edward Sutherland, m.s. Syd., ¥.z.c.p. Irel., Medical Officer, Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage, 341 Pitt-street. Stone, W.G., Assistant Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney. Stump, Claude Witherington, M.D., D.Sc., Assoc.-Professor of Auatomy in the University of Sydney ; p.r. 40 Shirley-rd.. Wollstonecraft. Stroud, Sydney Hartnett, F.1.C., Ph.c., c/o Elliott Bros., Ltd., Terry-street, Rozelle. | Sulman, Sir John, Kt., Warrung-st., McMahon’s Point, North Sydney. Sundstrom, Carl Gustaf, c/o Federal Match Co., Park Road, Alexandria. P 12\tSussmilch, C. A., F.a.s., F.S.T.c., A.M.1I.E. (Aust.), Principal of the East Sydney Technical College, and Assistant Super-- intendent of Technical Education. (President 1922. Hon. Secretary. . tSutherland, George Fife, a.R.c.sc., Lond., Assistant-Professor - in Mechanical Engineering, in the University of Sydney. Sutton, Harvey, 0.B.£.,M.D., D.P.H. Velb., B.Sc. Oxon., ‘ Lynton,” Kent Road, Rose Bay. Elected 1919 1916 1890 1921 1892 1903 1924. 1919 1910 1910 1879 ~~ bo co P 4, P5 (xa) Swain, Herbert John, B.a. Cantab., B.sc, B.e. Syd., Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering, ‘echnical College, Sydney. Tannahill, Robert William, B.Sc. Syd., ‘‘ Eastwell,” 40 Camma-- ray Avenue, North Svdney. Taylor, Harold B., p.sc., Kenneth-street, Longueville. Taylor, John Kingsley, Hawkesbury Agricultural College,. Richmond; p.r. 16 Ferrier-street, Rockdale. tTaylor, John M., m.a., LL.B. Syd., ‘Woonona,’ 43 East Crescent- street, McMahon’s Point, North Sydney. Taylor, Thomas Griffith, B.a., D.s-., B.8.. Professor of Geography in the University of Chicago. Teece, R., F.1.A., F.F.A., Wolseley Road, Point Piper. Thomas, David, B.E., Mim.mM, FG.S. 15 Clifton Avenue; Burwood. Thomas, John, u.s., ‘Remeura,’ Pine and Harrow Roads, Auburn. Thompson, Herbert William, ‘ Marathon,’ Francis-st.,Randwick Thompson, Joseph, M.a., LL.B., Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st.. Thorne, Harold Henry, B.a. Cantab., B.sc. Syd., Lecturer in Mathematics in the University of Sydney; p.r. Rutledge-st., Eastwood. Tillyard, Robin John, M.A., D.Sc. F.8.S., F.L.S., F.E.S., Chief: Commonwealth Entomologist, Canberra, F.c.T. Timcke, Edward Waldemar, Meteorologist, Weather Bureau, Sydney. Tindale, Harold, Works Engineer, c/o Australian Gas-Light Co., Mortlake. Toppin, Richmond Douglas, a.1.c., Parke Davis & Co., Rose- bery. Trebeck, P. C., ‘‘ Boera,’” Queen-street, Bowral. Tye, Cyrus Willmott Oberon. Under Secretary for Public Works, Public Works Dept., Sydney; p.r. 19 Muston-st.,. Mosman. Valder, George, J.p., 43 Albert-street, Mosman. Vicars, James, m.u.. Memb. Intern. Assoc. Testing Materials;, Memb. B. 58. Guild; Challis House, Martin Place. Vicars, Robert, Marrickville Woollen Mills, Marrickville. Vickery, George B., 9th Floor, Barrack House, Barrack-street.. Sydney. Vonwiller, Oscar U., B.sSc., F.tnst.P., Professor of Physics in the: University of Sydney. Hon. Secretary. Wade, Rev. Robert Thompson, u.a., Headfort School, Killara. Waley, Robert George Kinloch, 63 Pitt-street. Walker, Charles, ‘Lynwood,’ Terry Road, Ryde. Walker, Harold Hutchison, Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st.. Walker, H. O., ‘ Moora,’ Crown-street, Granville. ‘Elected 1919| Pl 11903 1901 1918 1913 | P 4 1922 11921 1924, 11919 1919|P3 “1919 1876 1910 1911 | Pl 11920 |P 22 1920; Pl 1921 1881 1922 11909 | P3 11918 1892 | P2 11923 1927 (1921 1920 (xx.) Walkom, Arthur Bache, p.sc., Macleay House, 16 College-st. Walsh, Fred.,, 3.P., Consul-General for Honduras in Australia and New Zealand; For. Memb. Inst. Patent Agents, Lon- don; Patent Attorney Regd. U.S.A.; Memb. Patent Law Assoc., Washington; Regd. Patent Attorn. Comm. of Aust.; Memb. Patent Attorney Exam. Board Aust.; 4th Floor, Barrack House, Barrack-street, Sydney ; p.r. ‘Walsholme,’ Centennial Park, Sydney. Walton, R. H., rc.s., ‘Flinders,’ Martin’s Avenue, Bondi. Ward, Edward Naunton, Curator of the Botanic Gardens, Syd. Wardlaw, Hy. Sloane Halcro, D.sv. Syd., Lecturer and Demon- strator in Physiology in the University of Sydney. Wark, Blair Anderson, v.c., D.S.0., M.1.Q.¢., ¢/o hompson and Wark, T. & G. Building, Elizabeth-street; p.r. ‘ Braeside,’ Zeta-street, Lane Cove, Sydney. {Waterhouse, G. Athol, p.sc, B.E., F.F.S., Curator of the Division of Economic Entomology, Canberra. Waterhouse, Leslie Vickery, B.r. Syd., 6th Floor, Wingello House, Angel Place, Sydney. Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.r. Syd., Lecturer and Demon- strator in Geology in the University of Sydney. Waterhouse, Walter L., M.C., B.Sc.Agr., DI.C., ‘Hazelmere,’ Chelmsford Avenue, Roseville. Watkin-Brown, Willie Thomas, r.r.u.s., Lucasville Road, Glenbrook. Watkins, John Leo, B.A. Cantab., m.a. Syd., University Club, Castlereagh-street ; p.r. 169 Avoca-street, Randwick. Watson, James Frederick, m.B., ch.m., ‘Midhurst,’ Woollahra. Watt, Robert Dickie, m.a., B.sce., Professor of Agriculture in the University of Sydney. (President, 1925). Vice- President. Welch, Marcus Baldwin, B.sc., A.1.c., Economic Botanist, T'ech- nological Museum. Wellish, Edward Montague, m.a., Associate-Professor in Math- ematics in the University of Sydney. Wenholz, Harold, Director of Plant Breeding, Department of Agriculture, Sydney. tWesley, W. H., London. Whibley, Harry Clement, 39 Moore-street, Leichhardt. {White, Charles Josiah, B.sc, Lecturer in Chemistry, Teacher’s College. White, Edmond Aunger, M.A.I.M.E., c/o Electrolytic Refining and Smelting Co. of Australia Ltd., Port Kembla, N.S.W. White, Harold Pogson, F.c.8., Assayer and Analyst, Depart- ment of Mines; p.r. ‘Quantox,’ Park Road, Auburn. Whitehouse, Frank, B.v.se, (Syd.) ‘ Dane Bank,’ Albyn Road, Strathfield. Wilkinson, Herbert oe B.A., M.B., Ch.M., Senior Lecturer and Demonstrator in Anatomy in the University of Sydney, p.v. 53 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill. Willan, Thomas Lindsay, B.Sc, c/o Alluvial Tin Malaya Ltd., Ho Hong Bank Bld., Market and Beach Streets, Penang, _ Straits Settlements. Williams, Harry, a.1.c.,c/o Whiddon Bros.’ Rosebery Lanolines Pty. Ltd., Arlington Mills, Botany. (xx1.) Elected 1924 Williams, William John, 18 Bridge-street, Sydney. 1923 Wilson, Stanley Hric, ‘Chatham,’ James-street, Manly. 1891 Wood, Percy Moore, u.R.c.p. Lond., M.R.c.s. Hng., ‘ Redcliffe,” Liverpool Road, Ashfield. 1906 |P 11) Woolnough, Walter George, D.Sc, F.a.s., ‘Callabonua,’ Park Avenue, Gordon. (President, 1926.) Vice-President. 1916 Wright, George, c/o Farmer & Company, Pitt-street. 1917 Wright, Gilbert, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Agricultural, Chemistry in the University of Sydney. 1921 Yates, Guy Carrington, 184 Sussex-street. Honorary MEMBERS. Limited to Twenty. M.—Recipients of the Clarke Medal. 1918 Chilton, Charles, m.A., D.Sc, M.B.,¢.M., etc., Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, Christchurch, N.Z. 1914 Hill, James P., D.sc., F.R.S., Professor of Zoology, University College, London. 1908 Kennedy, Sir Alex. B. W., Kt., uu.D., D. Eng., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Engineering in University College, London, 17 Victoria-street, Westminster, London S.W. 1915 Maitland, Andrew Gibb, F.a.s., Government Geologist of Western Australia, ‘ Bon Accord,’ 2 Charles-street, South. Perth, W.A. 1912 Martin, C. J., c.M.G., D.Sc., F.R.S., Director of the Lister Institute of Preventive Medicine, Chelsea Gardens, Chelsea Bridge Road, London, S.W. 1. 1894} M | Spencer, Sir W. Baldwin, k.c.M.G., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Biology in the University of Melbourne, National Museum, Melbourne. 1928 Smith, Grafton Elliott, M.a., M.D., F.R.S., F.R.c.P., Professor of Anatomy in the University College, London. 1900 | M | Thiselton-Dyer, Sir William Turner, K.c.M.G., C.I.E., M.A., LL.D., Se. D., F-R.S., The Ferns, Witcombe, Gloucester, England. 1915 Thomson, Sir J. J., 0.mM., D.Sc, F.R.S., Nobel Laureate, Master of Trinity College, Cambridge, England. 1921 Threlfall, Sir Richard, c.B.u., M.a., F.R.S., lately Professor of Physics in the University of Sydney, ‘Oakhurst, Church Road, Edgbaston, Birmingham, England. 1922 Wilson, James T., .8., ch.m. Edin., F.R.S., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Cambridge, England. 81 Grange Road, Cambridge, England. OBITUARY 1928-29. Ordinary Members. Elected, Elected. 1904 Cambage, Richard Hind 1887 MacCuiloch, Stanhope H. 1876 Cape, Alfred John 1897 Russell, Harry Ambrose 1876 Darley, Cecil West 19138 Scammell, William Joseph 1922 Fleming, Edward Patrick 1899 ‘Teece, Richard 1881 Knibbs, George Handley 1917 Willington, William Thomas. (XXL. ) AWARDS OF 'THE CLARKE MEDAL. Established in memory of ‘The Revd. WILLIAM BRANWHITE CLARKE, m.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc. Vice-President from 1866 to 1878. To be awarded from time to time for meritorious contributions to the ‘Geology, Mineralogy, or Natural History of Australia. The prefix * indicates the decease of the recipient. Awarded 1878 *Professor Sir Richard Owen. k.c.B., F.R.S. 1879 *George Bentham, c.M.G., F.R.S. 1880 *Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s. 1881 *Professor F. M’Coy, F.R.s., F.G.S. 1882 *Professor James Dwight Dana, LL.D. 1883 *Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.c.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. 1884 *Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. 1885 *Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, 0.M., @.c.s8.1.,C.B., M.D.,D.C.L., LL.D.,F.R.S. 1886 *Professor L. G. De Koninck, m.p. 1887 *Sir James Hector, K.c.M.G., M.D, F.R.S. ‘1888 *Rev. Julian E. Tenison-Woods, F.G.S., F.L.S. 1889 *Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.R.s., F.R.A.S. ‘1890 *George Bennett, m.D., F.R.c.s. Hng., F.L.S., F.Z.S. 1891 *Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.s8., F.G.S. 1892. = Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, k.c.M.G.,C.I.E.,M.A., LL.D., Sc, D., F.R.S., F.L.S., late Director, Royal Gardens, Kew. 1893 *Professor Ralph Tate, F..L.s., F.a.s. 1895 *Robert Logan Jack, LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.G.S. 1895 *Robert Etheridge, Jnr. 1896 *The Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, ¢.M.G., F.R.G.S. 1900 *Sir John Murray, K.C.B., LL.D., Se. D., F.R.S. 1901 *Edward John Eyre. 1902 *F. Manson Bailey, c.M.a.. F.L.S. 1908 *Alfred William Howitt, D.sc., F.G.S. 1907 Walter Howchin, r.a.s., University of Adelaide. 1909 Dr. Walter E. Roth, B.a., Pomeroon River, British Guiana, South America. 1912 *W. H. Twelvetrees, F.a.s. 1914 A. Smith Woodward, tu.D., F.R.s., Keeper of Geology, British Museum (Natural History) London. 1915 *Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S. 1917 += Professor Sir Edgeworth David, K.B.E., ¢.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., D.Se., F.R.S., F.G s., The University, Sydney. 1918 Leonard Rodway, c.m.a., Honorary Government Botanist, Hobart, Tasmania. 1920 *Joseph Edmund Carne, F.«.s. 1921 *Joseph James Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc., 1922 Richard Thomas Baker, The Crescent, Cheltenham. 1923 Sir W. Baldwin -Spencer, K.c.M.G., M.A., D.Sc. F.B.S., National * Museum, Melbourne. 1924 *Joseph Henry Maiden, 1.s.0., F.R.S., F.L.S., J.P. 1925 *Charles Hedley, F.u.s. 1927 Andrew Gibb Maitland, r.a.s., “Bon Accord,’ Melville Place, South Perth. 1928 Ernest C. Andrews, B.A., F.a.S., Government Geologist, Depart- of Mines, Sydney. (xxi) AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE. Money Prize of £25. Awarded, 1882 1882 1884 1886 1887 1888 1889 1889 1891 1892 1894 1894. 1895 1896 John Fraser, B.a., West Maitland, for paper entitled ‘The Aborigines of New South Wales.’ Andrew Ross, m.p., Molong, for paper entitled ‘Influence of the Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.’ The Society’s Bronze Medal and £25. W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper entitled ‘ Water supply in the Interior of New South Wales.’ S. H. Cox, F.a.s., F.c.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Tin deposits of New South Wales.’ Jonathan Seaver, ¥F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘Origin and mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated Minerals.’ Rev. J. E. Tenison- Woods, F.G.s., F.L.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to Australia.’ Thomas Whitelegge, F.R.M.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘ List of the Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrate Fauna of Port Jackson and Neighbourhood.’ Rev. John Mathew, m.a., Coburg, Victoria, for paper entitled ‘The Australian Aborigines.’ Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Micro- scopic Structure of Australian Rocks.’ Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper entitled ‘The effect which settlement in Australia has pro- duced upon Indigenous Vegetation.’ | J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper entitled the ‘ Timbers of New South Wales.’ R. H. Mathews, t.s., Parramatta, for paper entitled ‘The Abori- ginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.’ C. J. Martin, p.sc., m.B., F.R.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘'Il'he physiological action of the venom of the Australian black snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).’ Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The occurrence of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of the Deposits in which they are found.’ i 7, 4 =e = 9 ac ON eee ea Ee 0'V etl CUS TI oS Zh = |) O8Z0 0a) 2 = * SN eee LY oT SOOT BS OV = | "6c60 0) SSO NSUUlE eS Veal ooN\ acy. aaa | S805 1] «£57— |~ 82900 | -V -ON PElUTEhY se SLY Ja LOE cad b= 29960 | -¢ ON UUlETShY 1s97M Sp rT CoUG T= 657 = 4) 2296107) 9 °C ONS EES area 0'¢ cl SEOs Lil oot Sue CO9GI0N)| «at ON Bellershye ea “STOA "STOA {oyooTy att sD gly ‘poururexd sajdures YOL UL AyTIqnyos E—6 June, 1928. 66 A. R. PENFOLD. On fractional distillation, at 1-2 mm., of West Australian samples nos. 1 and 2, and East Indian no. 1, the following results were obtained :— W.A. Owl, No. 1. 400 c.c. crude oil. “a: : 15 20 20 M.Pt. of Boiling Point. Volume. di4 i Ue allophanate 110-140° 46c.c. 0.9388 —84° 14970 157° 14% 140-145° 62. ec, 0.9595 —7.2° 1.5081 153° 17% 1454-1464° 40 cc. 0.9627 —7.6° 1.5051 153° 123% 1464-147° 142c.c. 0.9627 —8.0° 1.5058 142-145° 10% Yield of Sere * 150-156° 40c.c. 0.9750 — 10°. 1.5089 — 3% 156-158° 20 ¢.c. 0.977 —J10:8~ arog — a Viscous residue LDS, W.A. Owl Sample No. 2. 100 c.c. 104-130° (3 mm.) 20 ¢.e. “093872 — 4.55° 1.4992 130-147° (3 mm.) 17 ce; = 9582 — 4.5° E5031 148-154° (3 mm.) D3 @.c. + 0.9691 — 3.8° 1.5068 Residue 1.5142 The East Indian oil distilled under similar conditions gave the following results, viz. :— No. 1 sample, 200 c.c. 135-141° (1-2mm.) 35¢.. 0.9690 — 15.9° 1.5040 141-145° (1-2mm.) 150¢.c. 0.9785 — 17.2° 1.5064 Residue 15;¢.¢; 50.999 — 24° 1.5150 The foregoing results clearly show that there exists a considerable difference in the alcoholic components of the West Australian and East Indian oils. The three samples of oil referred to above were then treated with equal weights of phthalic anhydride and benzene on a boiling water-bath, using 100 gram lots in each case. All the samples thus treated returned 70% of alcoholic constituents when isolated from the phthalic acid esters. Combination was effected after one hour’s treat- WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 67 ment, although two hours’ heating was given in each ease. The following results were obtained when the regenerated alcohols were subjected to fractional distillation under reduced pressure. W.A. Oil, No. 1. Boiling Point. Volume. diz an n> a fa 130-146° (1-2mm.) 10 ¢.c. 0.9622 —5.5° 1.5041 146-149° s 10 ¢.c. 0.9608 —6.1° 1.5050 150-154° =, «3S 40 ee. 0.9602 —7.6° 1.5058 Duplicate result. Below 151°(3 mm.) 6c.¢. 0.9615 —6.0° 1.5050 254-155°:(3 mm. )- 40 ¢.¢. 0.9622 —8.5° 1.5067 151° W.A. Oil, No. 2. 135-154° (3mm.) 14¢.c. 0.9865 Inactive 1.5060 162° 154-156° (3mm.) 50c.c. 0.9660 —3° 1.5068 152° East Indian Oil, No. 1. 140-150° (8mm.) 8c.c. 0.9793 — 14.4° 1.5055 150-155° (1mm.) 18¢.¢c. 0.9774 —19.6° 1.5064 162-163° Oxidation of Crude Oils. (a) The chemists of the Imperial Institute (Bulletin, Imperial Inst. 1920, 18, 163) found that the Australian oil yielded only 8% santalenic acid as against 20% obtained from the East Indian oil on oxidation with potassium permanganate, using Chapman’s process. (The particular sample of oil examined contained only 76-78% sesquiterpene alcohols.) The author repeated this work and obtained similar results, but the amount of tarry products formed with the Australian oil made it very difficult to estimate and purify the santalenic acid. A modified process of oxidation with potassium permanganate was adopted, which not 68 A. R. PENFOLD. only gave considerable increased yields of san- talenic acid, but the latter was obtained free of tarry products upon treatment of the West Australian oil. The process was as follows:— 00-grams of powdered potassium permanganate (70-grams required for the Australian oil) are placed in a winchester with 700 ¢.c. iced water, 300-grams ice and 20 «ec. of the Sandalwood oil and the mixture transferred quickly to a shaking machine when the oxidation is completed within a few minutes. The following average results: were thus obtained :— 20 c.c. of the East Indian oil yielded 6-7 grams of crude santalenic acid, 20 c.c. of the West Australian oil gave 2.5 to. 3.9 grams do. Computing from this basis, the Australian oil is considered to contain about 40-45% of Santalols. The santalenic acid obtained in every instance when purified from ethyl alcohol or acetone and water, melted sharply at 76°-76.5°. (b) The Australian oil when oxidised with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid solution alongside of the Hast Indian oil yielded small quantities of aldehyde, the semicarbazone of which melted at 230°, thus affording confirmation of the presence: of santalol. Preparation of the Allophanates. A study is being made of the action of cyanic acid upon the various alcohols with a view to their definite identifi- cation. The work is not yet completed, but sufficient data is available to show that the W.A. alcohols are a mixture of isomeric sesquiterpene alcohols with the santalols. The Kast Indian alcohols yielded a fine crystalline derivative melting at 162-163°. The Australian oil yielded a mixture WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 69 from which on repeated fractional crystallisation a definite fraction of melting point 162° was obtained, identical with santalol allophanate. A mixed melting point showed no depression. The remaining fractions varied in melting point from 148° to 152°, being probably mixtures with gantalol allophanate of M.Pt. 162-163°. The laevo-rotatory alcohol to be described under Santalum lanceolatum yielded a very beautiful derivative of melting point 114°. Combustion and molecular weight results confirmed their identity as allophanates. Determination of a Secondary Sesquiterpene Alcohol possessing Dextro Rotation. All commercial samples of the Australian oil were found to contain a small quantity, not above 10%, of an alcohol ‘which combined with phthalic anhydride only when heated in an oil bath at 140°. The uncombined oil remaining after the separation of the phthalic acid ester of the alcohols which combined with the anhydride in benzene solution on the boiling water bath was again heated with this reagent in an oil bath at 140° The regenerated alcohol for which a high degree of purity is not yet claimed, was found to possess the following chemical and_ physical characters. Nona No. 2. Boiling point (1 mm.) 145-154° = 146-150° Specific gravity 33° .. 0.9939 0.995 Opucal rotation -. .. + 184s aes Refractive Index, 20°. 1.5106 1.5100 Neither sample yielded a crystalline allophanate when treated with cyanie acid. Oils from Wood of own Distillation. The oil from wood of Hucarya spicata when. treated with phthalic anhydride in benzene solution on the boiling ‘water bath, yielded 50% of alcohols possessing the following characters :— 70 A. R. PENFOLD. B. point (4-5 mm.), 160-161° ; specific gravity, 0.942; optical rotation, +4.9°; and refractive index, 1.5039 at. 20°, The oil from wood of Santaluwm lanceolatum gave 70% of an alcohol on similar treatment possessing the following constants :— B. point, 163-165° (5 mm.); specific gravity, 0.9474; optical rotation, —66.7°; and refractive index, 1.5074 at 20°. The above laevo-rotatory alcohol gave combustion and molecular results approximating to a formula C,;H.,0. On treatment with cyanic acid an excellent yield of erystalline allophanate melting at 114° was obtained. As a result of the examination of the above oils distilled from the woods in this laboratory, it is evident that the West Australian oil contains a sesquiterpene alcohol of similar formula to santalol having the following approxi- mate constants :— B. point, 160-161° (4-5 mm.) ; specific gravity, 0.942- 943 ; optical rotation, +5°; and refractive index, 1.50380 at 20°. A mixture of this aleohol with the santalols would result in a Similar mixture of alcohols as occurs in W.A. Sandal- wood oil with a specific gravity of 0.962. This particular alcohol has not yet yielded a crystalline allophanate nor santalenic acid on oxidation. Distinction between Australian and East Indian Oils by means of Colour Reaction for Sesquiterpenes. Small quantities of sesquiterpenes are present in the Australian oils as is evident by the violet red colour re- action obtained with bromine vapour when the crude oils: are dissolved in acetic acid. This colour reaction for ses- quiterpenes in Australian essential oils is a very commom one, and has been much referred to in the author’s com- WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SANDALWOOD OIL. 71 munications to this Society. The East Indian oils, however, do not give this colour reaction when tested under the same conditions. Although the colour obtained is not a very intense one on account of the small quantities of sesquiterpenes present, yet at the present time it offers a ready method of rapidly differentiating the two oils if a quick test be required. The author is very diffident of colour reactions, but has found the present one to be reliable. | In conclusion, I wish to express my best thanks for valuable assistance rendered by the various firms engaged in the Sandalwood oil business, such as Messrs. Plaimar Ltd., Perth, Braddock & Co. Ltd., Perth, and W. K. Burnside Pty. Ltd., Melbourne. I am also indebted to the Assistant Economie Chemist, Mr. F. R. Morrison, F.C.S., A.A.C.I., for assistance in this investigation. 72 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. THE OCCURRENCE OF A NUMBER OF VARIETIES OF EUCALYPTUS DIVES AS DETERMINED BY CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF THE ESSENTIAL OILS. Parr EH, (With remarks on the Ortho-cresol method for estimation of Cineol) By A. R. PENFoLD, F.A.C.1., F.C.S. Curator and Economic Chemist, and I’, RK. Morrison, A.A:C.1,, here Assistant Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney. (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 4th July, 1928) Eucauyptus Dives. var. ‘‘C’’, In our Part I. communication to the Society on the 1st June, 1927 (this Journal, Vol. LXI., page 63), reference was made to the commercial distillation of this form of Eucalyptus dives, at Tumbarumba, N.S.W. We questioned the advisability of its distillation on account of the varia- tion in composition of the essential oil due to the periodic occurrence of phellandrene, which rendered it unsaleable as a pharmaceutical oil. The position with regard to the exploitation of the species, at the time of publication, was a serious one, as the distillers had been forced to close down for the reasons set forth. It was apparent that a field inspection was urgently desired, and accordingly we visited the Tumbar- umba district in October, 1927. Previous field experiences enabled us to select belts of country which would be reasonably safe to work as phellandrene and piperitone EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 73 could not be detected upon erushing the leaves between the fingers, the exquisite aroma of the blend of cineol-terpineol- citral which emanated therefrom being a characteristic feature of the majority of leaves from selected fields. Representative samples of the leaves and terminal branchlets were personally collected from a series of belts of country which were examined in the Tumbarumba district in order to check the field observations, and the results set forth in the table afford such confirmation in quite a remarkable manner. ‘This visit, which occupied but a week-end, enabled the distillers to recommence operations, and to provide an excellent source of oil of the Eucalyptus Australiana type, for which there is a steadily increasing demand. It is the Eucalyptus oil par excellence for pharmaceutical purposes. There is a considerable enquiry for high grade water white oils from EH. Australiana and other species yielding oils similar in physical properties and chemical composition, and the economic aspect of the observations recorded in this paper are of far-reaching importance. It is only a matter of time when this type of oil must replace the ‘*Mallee’’ oils altogether for medicinal purposes. Many samples of the oil of EH. dives and its varieties have been examined since 1917, but not one from this district had been found to be free of cineol and to contain piperitone and phellandrene in abundance, thus approxi- mating to the composition of the oil of the normal E. dives. This fact was difficult of explanation up to the time of our field inspection, but a cursory examination of the first belt of country examined soon revealed trees of the type. We view this detection of the Type E. dives in this district as an observation of great importance, as otherwise it would be difficult to be convinced of its relationship to variety 74 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. ‘‘C’’, particularly on account of the wide divergence in composition of the respective essential oils. Many of the observations made in the course of the selection of suitable areas for commercial exploitation are worthy of record. Mention was made in our Part I. paper of a clump of 5 trees near Goulburn, 2 of which consisted. of the normal E. dives, and 3 of Variety ‘‘B’’. Similar instances were noted at Tumbarumba, an example: at School Hill being most striking. A sample of oil had. previously been distilled from the leaves and terminal branchlets selected from a clump of seven trees, and on. examination had been found to contain a small quantity of phellandrene, thus rendering an otherwise excellent oil valueless for medicinal purposes. The particular belt of country known as the School Hill was found to be in general a very excellent field, the leaves being longer and broader and the trees heavier in leaf than those in other areas. Moreover, from the leaves on crushing emanated. the excellent aroma of cineol-terpineol-citral. It was, therefore, very difficult to account for the adverse report, and a special search was made for the patch of trees from which the leaves had been selected. They were subsequently located, and found to be botanically identical. The first six examined were found to be true to H. dives, var. ‘‘C’’; the seventh, however, was found to: be rich in phellandrene (piperitone and piperitol could. also be detected, but very little cineol), and to be approxi- mately the variety ‘‘B’’. It is a remarkable fact that if the leaves of the first six trees only had been distilled the oil would have been very favourably reported upon, whereas, the admixture of the leaves from the seventh tree resulted in the oil being condemned on account of the presence of phellandrene. (See result in Table.) ! EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 71> Again at Mannus Hill, on the left hand side of the road a number of trees of the type were found growing distri- buted amongst a preponderance of trees of variety ‘‘B’’ and variety ‘‘C’’, whilst on the right hand side trees of variety ‘‘B’’ were found distributed throughout a belt of variety ‘‘C’’, which predominated. It was a strange experience to crush the leaves of a tree and to note the pronounced piperitone-phellandrene odour, and to compare it with that from a tree but three feet away, the leaves of which, when similarly treated, exhaled the refreshing aroma of cineol with a little citral. Unfortunately, these most interesting areas of country had, of course, to be rejected as being of no value for commercial distillation at the present time. Other areas. of country near Rosewood and Glenroy in the Tumbarumba district consisting almost entirely of variety ‘‘C’’ were selected and recommended for commercial distillation. Summarising the Tumbarumba district as a whole, we can state that the belts of H. dives are the diametrically oppo- site of the better known belts of the type. The latter contain but a small percentage of trees of variety ‘*A’’ and variety ‘‘B’’ as compared with many of the former, which consist almost entirely of variety ‘‘C’’, with a small percentage of trees of variety ‘‘B’’ and the normal type. Many analyses made since the reopening of the field in October last on samples representing tons of oil procured from the selected fields have shown phellandrene not to be detected according to the B.P. test, and the cineol content to vary from 60% to 70%. Abundant evidence has thus. been provided for the justification of our recommendations based upon field observations. Determination of Cineol. Opportunity was taken to determine the cineol contents. of the oils by the new ortho-cresol method proposed by T. ‘poyjew JOsat9-0yJIQ = 4 *poyjJoUl UIDIOSOY =, oouep OATS "SJOA Q] (9943 412) : «Gy “IVA “Sap! VLL | LET | -UMqe | x%2Z | %S Osul= We2Zh | os 9e— | p0es0 | %720 727 / INH POSS Axjunoy PO AEN Sepa Bes cl =| ABOSGe | Y6RS" | = © el ce9V ob+| VIZ60 | SCP ee UN - (peo.s fo apis eouep |4(%T) . pury 4311) zi aA, “IEA ‘Saap'y| TOOT | 77S =| -URqe | 4%p~% | %8 VT |9897T| ov I2- | 22060 | STE | TH shuuep (peos jo opts %0v pury 32] ) adh Saaip'y| —— | ——— | ynoqge | ere CS ‘SOA HT |ZI8PT] o9 C- | 66060 | %z9' 1 | TH snuuey | /761/01/¢z a 2 j “UOlze] aoe ae | = = aati : “£990V des qoy | ; suanuone, lOuColy. UIE “704 coe -ueyioua | oom. | auoquadia eaeercel te Ve? a oan “Aqe007] aqeq meg 19184 | S3ianl S 1348q | : = "M’'S'N ‘“Bquanivquiny, Woy GSATIAINVA SLI GNV SHAIC SALdA TVONA— ATE, EUCALYPTUS DIVES. 17 Tusting Cocking (Paper read before the British Pharma- ceutical Conference, 1920; see ‘‘Perfumery and Essential Oil Record’’, August, 1920, page 281). The method has: since been reported upon by the Essential Oil Sub-Com- mittee to the Standing Committee on Uniformity of Analytical Methods and the findings published in the ‘“Analyst’’ for May, 1927. As a result of our own work we must admit that the method is an excellent one, and in our opinion should certainly be adopted by the B.P. Authorities as a standard method. In a series of experiments conducted with various. commercial Eucalyptus oils very good agreement was. observed when the method was tested against the older and better known phosphoric acid process. It is necessary to. point out, however, that abnormal percentages of cineol were found with oils of the EH. Australiana type, which, of course, includes H. dives, var. ‘‘C’’, due to the presence of a-terpineol. Mr. T. Tusting Cocking in his original paper mentioned that alcohols and esters gave high results, but looked upon the variation as negligible for B.P. oils. In our opinion, the variation is too great to be overlooked, and we would suggest that the determination be made on the portion distilling below 190° when applied to oils of this type, in order to ensure accurate results. A comparison of the results as set forth in the following table exemplifies our contention in a striking manner, © V1Z. :— E. dives, var. §*C’’. Crude Oil. Cineol contents Congealing Cineol contents. by Cresol Point method, using” Phos. portion of oil. (UES=Bs acid Cresol distilling Method). method. method. below 190°. Sample No. 1 —17° 57-58% 67.5% 59% (Nichol’s Country) Sample No. 2 ailim 62-63% 71.4% 64% (Commercial) 78 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. Determination of a-Terpineol. The presence of a-terpineol was confirmed by distilling 200 ec. of H. dives oil, var. ‘‘C’’ (see table), and examin- ing the portion distilling above 190°. After further distillation, 16 ¢.c. were obtained boiling between 95-110° at 10 mm., and possessing the following constants, viz. :— dks, 0.9383 ; a%° + 0.3°; n® 1.4780. These figures indicate a high content of a-terpineol. ‘The alcohol reacted very readily with both phenylisocya- nate and napthylisocyanate, giving good yields of the respective phenylurethane and napthylurethane melting respectively at 113° and 148°. The constituent accompany- ing the cineol in the fraction distilling below 190° could not be isolated for identification, as on treatment with 50% ‘aqueous resorcin solution the whole went into solution. The additive compound of cineol and resorcin was separated and purified and found to be a jae stable combination. It melted at 83°. The two samples of oil of var. ‘‘B’’ examined were found to be low in piperitone. It is as well to make mention of the fact that in such instances the corresponding alcohol | is present. Puiperitol is very difficult of separation and identification in the absence of large quantities of crude oil, but is readily detected by its characteristic odour, and consequently we are able to satisfy ourselves of its presence ‘when handling comparatively small quantities of oil and leaves. In conclusion, our thanks are due to the Forestry ‘Commission of New South Wales and its officer, Mr. Boyd, for providing facilities for the field inspection at Tumbar- umba, and to Messrs. F. Heinecke and M. Kinstler for -assistance and interest during the visit. WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 79 SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE WOODINESS OR BULLET DISEASE OF PASSION FRUIT. By R. J. NOBLE, Ph.D., M.Sc., B.Sc. Agr., Biologist, Department of Agriculture, Sydney. (With Plates I-IV) (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 4th July, 1928) Commercial production of passion fruit (Passiflora edulis, Sims) in N.S.W. is limited practically to the coastal areas. The vines are grown in plantation blocks or are interplanted with citrus in the early years of the establish- ment of citrus orchards. Many growers have relied upon the crop as their main source of income until their citrus areas have approached the stage of profitable production. There is keen demand for passion fruit on the local market, but in spite of favourable prices for good quality fruit, and in spite of the fact that there are large areas in the State which are suitable for passion fruit production, the supply of fruit is still unequal to the demand. Several attempts also have been made to establish a passion fruit pulp industry and guaranteed prices have been offered to growers for the regular supply of fruit, but these efforts have proved abortive. The records on production of the crop in N.S.W. have been compiled annually by the Government Statistician for the past 15 years, and this information is shown | graphically in text Fig. 1. It will be noted that, although there was a general increase in the number of vines in bearing from 1921-1925, there was not a comparable ‘mcrease in production during this period. In 1924, 221,178 80 R. J. NOBLE. vines and in 1925, 219,188 are recorded in bearing, and the peak in production was reached in 1925, when 73,079 bushels of fruit were harvested. This figure, however, does. not greatly exceed the 58,901 bushels which were harvested in 1920 from 95,257 vines. The average annual yields per vine have been calculated from the data on production for the past fifteen years and are shown in the following table :— Passion Fruit Production in N.S.W. Average Yield per Vine—1913-1927. bushels. bushels. bushels. P98" 2. “use TOTB oy. AE 1923 °°) ao MODAL oy foil POM bly - 43 1924... 80 1915 obe 48 EO2Os 161 1925)... 488 L9G. L220 746 OA hy) 48 1926. |. A agate VOUT. 5). Ad hO22 See aR 192%. 39'S There are records of production in individual planta- tions in which the yield has exceeded 2 bushels per vine, but the average yield for the State for the past five years is only .31 bushels per vine, thus indicating that there is considerable room for improvement in the methods of production. It will be noted from the above table that relatively high average yields were obtained during the five-year period prior to 1920. This may have stimulated interest in the erop and thus partly explain the increase in the number of vines planted during the period 1921-25. Subsequent yields, however, have been disappointing, and a decrease in the number of vines planted is now recorded. Although the passion fruit will thrive on a variety of soil types in this State, the best returns under local conditions only have been obtained when proper attention has been paid to suitability of location, cultural details, tte WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 8] addition of adequate and suitable fertilisers and pruning. There are instances, however, in which the vines have received apparently suitable treatment and yet have failed to produce satisfactory returns. Under average conditions it is considered that the vines are most productive during the first 3 or 4 years of growth. After this period most vines are obviously unproductive and are removed. There are commercial plantations, on the other hand, in which aig: Thousands 90 220 80 200 70 180 60 160 50 140 40 #120 30 100 20 80 10 60 fe) 40 , Ma 4 15 16 17 "16 '19 "20 ‘ell ‘22 '23 "24 '25) "26 127 Passion Fruit Production in New South Wales from 1913=[927. A.—Production in bushels. P.—Total Vines in bearing. the vines are 8-10 years old and are still in a state of profitable production. There are isolated instances, also, of individual vines 15 to 20 years of age which are still producing fruit. In contrast to the above, vines may become entirely unproductive in their first season of growth. Although lack of attention to cultural details is partly responsible for the relatively poor yields which are now being obtained, it is considered that the present unsatis- F—July 4, 1928. 82 R. J. NOBLE. factory position is mainly due to the incidence of disease. Two diseases of passion fruit are of special importance in this connection: (a) Brown Spot caused by the fungus Gloeosporium fructigenum Berk, and (b) Woodiness. It is difficult to suggest which disease has been respon- sible for the most serious losses, but it is considered that satisfactory control of these diseases would result in a considerable improvement in production in this State. There is no doubt that the Woodiness disease is mainly responsible for the relatively short period of productive- ness of vines under local conditions. History of the Disease. The Woodiness disease has lone been known as a disease of passion fruit in N.S.W. Allen! in 1901 described several features of a deterioration disease in passion fruit, and a few months later Cobb*® published a more complete descrip- tion of the trouble and also stated that the disease was known to have occurred in the State prior to 1893, and was even then a matter of serious concern to growers. The disease is now known to occur throughout the eastern States of Australia, but apparently causes most serious damage only in N.S.W. Symptoms of the Disease. The Woodiness disease of passion fruit was thus named by Cobb (loc. cit.) in allusion to the condition of the fruits which are produced on diseased vines. The condition is most commonly observed during the cooler months of the year, although severely diseased plants may be observed at any time of the year. Individual vines only may be affected, or the disease may affect all the vines in a plan- tation. The Winter crop of fruit is more severely affected with Woodiness than is the case with the Summer crop. It has also been observed that slightly affected vines which WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 83 ‘previously had produced woody fruits may subsequently produce normal fruits during the warmer months. Such vines, however, are not as productive as those which have not been affected with the disease. (a) The Fruit. Fruits which are ripened on normal vines are dark purple in colour, somewhat ovoid in shape, and are generally symmetrical in appearance. On drying slightly these fruits become shrivelled in a characteristic manner (Plate 1, Figs. 1 and 2). Woody fruits, on the other hand, are generally mis- sshapen and deformed. Such fruits are often undersized and when not obviously malformed may be somewhat spherical in appearance. This symptom has given rise to a second common name by which the disease is known, viz., ““Bullet’’. The surface of the fruit may be smooth as in the case of normal fruits, but more generally it is charac- terised by the development of cracks and occasionally by the development of irregularly shaped areas of tissue which appear to have burst through the skin of the fruit (Plate 1, Figs. 3 and 4). The colour of the woody fruits may be almost normal, although generally such fruits develop an_ abnormal purplish colouration in contrast to the natural colour of healthy fruits. Woody fruits are characteristic- ally hardened, offer considerable resistance to pressure, and, in contrast to normal fruits, are not readily cut through. Such fruits on drying do not shrivel uniformly ain the manner described for healthy fruits. When abnor- mal fruits of this type are cut through, the tissues of the pericarp or rind are noticed to be abnormally thickened (Plate 2, Fig. 5). Each seed in a normal fruit 1s surrounded by a bright yellow-coloured arillus which in the mass constitutes the 84 R. J. NOBLE. edible pulp of the fruit and which possesses a characteris- tically piquant flavour. Woody fruits, on the other hand, contain a much anit quantity of pulp, which is somewhat orange in colour and through which the black-coated seeds are more readily observed. The flavour of the pulp of such fruits is insipid and undesirable. In some cases the woody fruits may be practically devoid of contents, although superficially there may be little to distinguish them at times from the fruits. of a normal plant. Many of the seeds of a diseased fruit are undeveloped. Although the abovementioned features. refer particularly to the mature fruits, symptoms of woodiness also may be observed in fruits which are in the early stages of development. Such fruits are deformed, the pericarp shows signs of abnormal thickening, and many may fall from the vine before reaching maturity Histological studies of the pericarp of abnormal fruits indicate that it differs materially from that of a normal fruit. In transverse section the pericarp of a normal fruit is seen to be composed of (a) an outer epidermal layer one cell wide, and then a subepidermal layer three cells wide, immediately underlying which is (b) a hypodermal band of small, rounded, thick-walled sclerenchymatous cells approximately three cells wide, and then (c) a much wider section of parenchymatous tissue which also includes the vascular elements (Plate 2, Fig. 6). In abnormal fruits extensive changes are observed to have occurred in the tissues which constitute the innermost section of the pericarp. The cell walls of this altered tissue are thickened and pitted, and the cells are either devoid of or almost devoid of normal contents. Tests with an alcoholic solution of phloroglucin followed by hydrochloric acid, and tests with usual staining reagents, indicate that these cells are strongly lignified. ee WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 85 The lignification may be restricted to cells adjacent to the hypodermal layer of sclerenchymatous tissue or it may extend throughout the whole of the inner portion of the pericarp (Plate 2, Fig. 7). (b) The Foliage. The foliage of diseased vines is also abnormal. Such vines have a general appearance of unthriftiness and appear also as if suddenly checked in growth. The leaves of the terminal shoots may be stunted and are frequently eurled, twisted and deformed. Changes may occur in the chlorophyll-bearing tissues which result in the development ~ of a yellowish green chlorosis, or there may be formed a definite mosaic of abnormally light green and dark green areas on the leaf. The tissues of the leaf between the veins may be raised or sunken, thus giving the leaf a puckered or crinkled appearance (Plate 3, Figs. 8 and 9; Plate 4, Fig. 10). Light yellowish green spots may develop on older leaves which previously were full-grown and otherwise quite healthy in appearance. The stems of affected plants, particularly in the region of terminal shoots, may develop mottled dark green areas which are in marked contrast to the normal green colouration of healthy plants. These foliar symptoms have been observed under ‘field conditions both in seedlings and in aged vines. Nature of the Disease. _ Many different theories have been advanced as to the ‘causal nature of the disease. Allen’ suggested that the disease was most serious in vines which were planted in exposed positions in which they were subjected to high winds. Frosts and cool nights at the time of setting of the fruit were considered as a possible cause of the disease, particularly on vines impoverished through age or lack of adequate fertilisers. Insufficient moisture and the influence ‘of hot and dry summers were also considered of impor- 86 R. J. NOBLE. tance. The same writer? has also stated that ‘‘plants: raised from seed from selected vines and planted out with every care have been known, owing to hail followed by drought, to have developed ‘‘bullet’’ at a very early stage: and never to have made a payable return’’. Cobb® has reiterated and discussed these possibilities, and has also figured an undetermined fungus which he had found in: association with diseased fruits. In the present study, although the characteristic features. of the disease did not indicate that the condition was due to the action of a parasitic bacterial or fungus organism,, tissue platings and other observations were made to provide: further information in this respect. In no instance was. any organism isolated which suggested a causal relationship: in this connection. Infection Experiments. The foliar symptoms of diseased plants indicated that: the ‘‘ Woodiness’’ disease might be due to the action of a virus. In November, 1926, a series of inoculation experi- ments were initiated with a view to determining whether this was the case. Water infusions were prepared from. diseased leaves, and from fully-developed and partially-. developed woody fruits, and small quantities of this. material were inoculated into the stems of healthy plants, but in no case did disease develop. In view of subsequent tests it is possible that the temperatures experienced during the incubation period of the tests were unfavourable for the development of symptoms. The results of the first series of successful experiments. in this connection are indicated below. As in previous instances, seed was obtained from normal fruits and the test seedlings were raised in an insect-proof glass-house. Plant tissue infusions were prepared from leaves and fruits: WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 87 of diseased vines. The tissues were cut up finely, covered with tap water, and the extract was then decanted and used as inoculum. The method of inoculation was similar to that described by McKinney.’? A few strands of sterile cotton wool were soaked in the tissue extract and were then placed in the axil of a leaf of the plant, and then inserted in the vascular region of the stem by means of a needle. Special precau- tions were taken to avoid contamination in the separate test series. Check plants comprised uninjured seedlings, seedlings in which the stems were punctured with a sterile needle, or in which were inserted strands of sterile cotton wool soaked in water. Nine seedlings were inoculated on the 13th April, 1928, in the manner described above, using leaf tissue extract as inoculum. Ten days later the first signs of disease were noted in the developing leaves of three plants. On the following day all of the nine plants were showing definite signs of infection. The leaf blades in all cases were very much curled downwards, the tips of the young leaves being pressed up against the base of petioles. Further changes developed in these plants within the following two weeks. Elongation of the stems was checked; some of the newer leaves became chlorotic, while others developed marked mosaic mottling and others showed puekering of the tissues between the veins and other distortions of the laminae. Five weeks after commencement of the test it was noticed that small yellowish spots were developing on the mature leaves of the inoculated plants. Six check plants in this test and thirty-six untreated plants growing under the same conditions remained healthy. The check plants were still healthy two months later (Plate 4, Fig. 11). Similar results were obtained in a further test with diseased leaf tissue collected from vines in another locality. Four 88 R. J. NOBLE. plants were inoculated on the 7th May, 1928, and pro- nounced symptoms of disease were noted fifteen days to twenty-four days after inoculation. Four check plants remained healthy. | Tests with water extracts of the tissues of woody passion fruits also produced similar results. Six plants were inoculated with the water extract from woody fruit tissues on the 4th May, 1928, and definite symptoms of disease similar to those already described were noted in all six plants twenty to twenty-seven days after inoculation. Four check plants remained healthy. Further tests are in progress with filtered extracts derived from the tissues of diseased plants. During the course of field studies on the disease it was observed that certain plants of another species, viz., Passiflora coerulea Linn, showed a diseased condition of the foliage which resembled somewhat a mosaic condition occasionally seen on the commercially cultivated vines of Passiflora edulis. A plant tissue extract was prepared from the foliage of these abnormal plants and was used in an infection experiment with seedlings of Passiflora edulis. Six plants were inoculated on the 13th April, 1928, and marked symptoms of disease similar to those described in previous tests were observed on four plants thirteen to twenty days after inoculation. Six check plants remained healthy. All check plants throughout each of these series of tests have remained in a healthy condition and are still normal. Masking of Symptoms. It will be noted that the incubation period varied con- siderably in respect of the several infection experiments reported above. In some plants definite signs of infection appeared 10 days after inoculation, and in other cases infection was not recorded until 27 days after inoculation. WOODINBESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 89 In the first series also it was observed that, although marked foliar symptoms of disease had appeared in all inoculated plants eleven days after inoculation, the new growth which thad developed 30 to 40 days after inoculation was appar- ently normal. Subsequent growth in these plants has since developed diseased symptoms similar to those which had first appeared in the plants. No facilities were available for maintaining uniform temperature conditions during the progress of these tests, but thermographic records were maintained throughout this period. No definite correlations can be made between the development of symptoms and the prevalence of definite temperatures, but it is significant that temperatures in -excess of 80° F. were experienced prior to and during the ~ period in which normal leaves were developed on plants ‘which were known to be infected with the disease. The ‘variation in the incubation period reported in the later infection tests is considered to be mainly due to the influ- ‘ence of the air temperatures to which the plants were ‘exposed. | Similar phenomena have been observed under field conditions. New, apparently healthy shoots have been produced on diseased vines at various periods throughout the year. As previously indicated also, the disease is typically one which is most serious during the Winter months, and plants which have produced abnormal fruits -during this period may produce normal fruit during the ‘Summer months. DISCUSSION. It is considered from the evidence reported above that ‘the Woodiness disease of passion fruit can be attributed to the action of a virus. The virus has been proved to be ‘present in the leaves and shoots of vines which have pro- -duced woody fruits, and these fruits have also been proved 90 R. J. NOBLE. to contain the virus which, on inoculation into healthy plants, has resulted in the development of the characteristice foliar symptoms of disease. A number of the inoculated test plants are being retained to determine whether the- disease will be developed in the fruits which they may develop at a later period. It is considered, however, that the disease is of sufficient importance to justify an. announcement of the results which already have been. obtained. A Mosaic disease of Passionflower in England is listed by Bewley,5 but no further information as to its character: has been available to the writer. The general foliar symptoms of plants in the present study are characteristic of those which have been discribed in a large number of cultivated plants known to be affected. with a virus disease. In the infection experiments it was noted also that the symptoms of the disease in the inoculated plants varied from time to time in different plants, and at the conclusion of the tests some plants were observed to be very much. more severely affected with the disease than was the case with others. Although this may be explained in part on the basis of partial masking, it is possible that the virus. used on the tests was a mixed one, but further data is required before this aspect of the problem can be: elucidated. Lignified cells or stone-cells are known to occur normally in a wide variety of plants. Artschwager3 mentions that the presence of such cells in potato tubers may be regarded as a normal varietal characteristic. Their occurrence in certain varieties of pears is also a well-known phenomenon, although their excessive development in these fruits may result in the production of a diseased condition known as Lithiasis, which generally is attributed to the incidence of unfavourable environmental conditions. WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 9] The occurrence of lignified cells in tissues which do not normally contain them, however, may be due to the influence: of diseases of the virus type. Artschwager,‘ in studies on the changes which develop in potatoes affected with phloem necrosis, has described an abnormal tissue development which consisted of a progressive legnification of cells im the phloem region, and he records also a conclusion reached by Quanjer (loc. cit.), that the hgnification of the cells of the phloem is a dependable diagnostic symptom for the identification of leaf-roll, a serious virus disease affecting this crop. The extensive lignification of the tissues of the pericarp of woody passion fruits would appear also to be another definite manifestation of the effects of a virus disease. The masking of symptoms such as has been noted in the case of the Woodiness disease is also a characteristic feature of many virus diseases affecting cultivated plants, and this phenomenon has been recorded by a number of observers. Johnson® has shown that manifestation of symptoms in several different types of plants affected with virus diseases. depended on the air temperatures to which they were exposed. Critical temperatures varied according to the type of plant under investigation. Tompkins,'3 in a series. of temperature control experiments, demonstrated that relatively short exposure to air temperatures in excess of 24° C. was sufficient to mask development of symptoms of mosaic in potatoes. Subsequent exposures to low tempera- tures enabled mosaic symptoms to appear again. Wilcox™ also records a masking effect of high temperatures in rela- tion to development of mosaic symptoms in raspberries, and quite recently Plakidas’ has recorded that strawberry Xanthosis (Yellows) is due to the action of a virus, the effects of which are masked by exposure to temperatures 92 R. J. NOBLE. above 80° F. (24° C.). Elmer’ has reviewed the results of previous workers in this connection, and, in a discussion of the results of his own experiments with tomatoes affected with mosaic, suggests ‘‘that plants growing in optimum environmental conditions for vegetative growth will exhibit symptoms after a shorter incubation period following mosaic infection than will plants that are not making a vigorous growth’’. The maskine of symptoms of the Woodiness disease under commercial conditions is of special practical signifi- cance. Passion fruit plants may be affected with the virus and may show but little signs of infection during the Summer months. These vines may be pruned severely in October or November with a view to the production of a heavy winter crop. Such action, however, might be quite disastrous owing to the high proportion of woody fruits which may develop in this crop, whereas a more profitable return might have been obtained from the vines had they been allowed to mature the summer crop in a normal manner. Two other destructive plant diseases recently investi- gated in Australia have been proved to be due to the action of parasitic viruses, e.g., Bunchy Top in bananas and Spotted Wilt of tomatoes. Both of these diseases, however, could only be reproduced consistently in infection experiments by means of an appropriate insect vector. Magee? demonstrated that Bunchy Top was transmitted by means of the banana aphis (Pentalonia nigrovenosa Cql.), and Pittman,” in trials with a number of potential carriers of the virus of Spotted Wilt, showed that this disease was transmitted by means of the rose thrips (Thrips tabaci Lindeman). WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 93 In the case of the Woodiness disease it has been shown that, under suitable conditions, the virus which causes the diseasé may be transmitted mechanically. Under field conditions it is possible that the disease is: transmitted in a number of different ways. The rubbing of the shoots of diseased vines against the adjacent shoots of healthy vines may be a prolific source of infection. Growers may unwittingly transfer the disease during pruning operations, and particularly when rubbing off the laterals in the early stages of growth of vines when the latter are being trained on to the supporting wires. Insects which feed on the diseased vines and then migrate to healthy vines may occasionally also result in transmission of the disease, although further information in this respect is not yet available. SUGGESTIONS FOR CONTROL OF THE DISEASE. The present status of this investigation makes it possible for several suggestions to be made in reference to control measures :— 1. Seedlings should not be raised in proximity to diseased vines. Severely diseased seedlings frequently have been observed in such locations. 2. Only healthy seedlings should be planted out. Symp- toms of the Woodiness disease can be readily detected in seedlings in the Spring, and any diseased plants should be immediately removed and destroyed. 3. Careful systematic inspections should be made of the vines in young plantations, and any vines which are stunted in growth or which show signs of foliage abnormality of the types already described should be removed and destroyed. 4. Very careful observations should be made of vines at the time of pruning, particularly in the first season of 94 R. J. NOBLE. erowth. It is most likely that infection may be carried on the hands of those working among the vines, and care should be taken to wash the hands well in soapy water after dealing with a diseased vine and before working with healthy vines. Field evidence supports the view that replacements can be safely made shortly after removal of diseased vines. When the plantation is more than one year old, the vines generally have become entangled with one another on the wires. The removal of a diseased vine then becomes a matter of extreme difficulty, and it is ques- tionable whether this is desirable. Removal can hardly be effected without injuring the shoots of adjacent vines in the row and thus increasing risks of infection. If there are but few of such vines present it would pro- bably be preferable to cut them off at the roots and then to remove the vines several weeks after they had dried out. Removal of the diseased vines in this con- dition then would be less likely to result in infection of the adjacent vines. However, when infection is widespread throughout a plantation, all vines should be destroyed as soon as practicable; but if the crop indications are such that an immediate return appears possible, efforts should be made to concentrate on the Summer crop from such an area. A plantation in this condition should not be pruned with a view to forcing a Winter crop, as such a crop would be practically value- less. Neglected plantations and even isolated vines showing evident signs of deterioration constitute a very real menace in the perpetuation of the Woodiness disease, and every effort should be made to destroy vines in this condition. It has been demonstrated that the Woodiness disease may be transmitted mechanically; thus it is possible WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 95 that a number of agencies may be concerned in the transmission of the disease under field conditions. Although the passion vine is not normally subject to serious visitations by insect pests, insects may at times be concerned in the transmission of the disease. It is generally impracticable to apply sprays effectively to vines growing under commercial conditions, owing to the impossibility of obtaining satisfactory distribu- tion on the dense mass of foliage. As a measure of good cultural procedure, however, all weeds which might act as harbours for insect pests should be kept down as much as possible. SUMMARY. . Passion fruit production in N.S.W. is an industry of special local importance, but although satisfactory returns occasionally have been obtained by individual growers, the returns in most instances are disappoint- ing. The position is well illustrated by the data on production for the State. The average annual yield per vine for the 5 years’ period 1923-1927 was .31 bushels. Records from individual plantations have exceeded 2 bushels per vine. There is an increasing demand for the fruit, but the returns obtained by growers have resulted in discour- agement, and the industry as a whole is in a somewhat languishing condition. This condition is considered to be due mainly to the incidence of two diseases which affect the crop, viz., Brown Spot caused by the fungus Gloeosporium fruc- tigenum, and a disease known as Woodiness or Bullet. The latter disease has been the subject of the present study. 96 R. J. NOBLE. Woodiness was known to occur in N.S.W. prior to 1893, and it is still a serious limiting factor in production. Symptoms of the disease may be recognised in the general deteriorated appearance of affected vines, in abnormalities of the shoots and foliage, and in the woody character of the fruits. Many theories have been advanced as to the nature of the disease, but infection experiments have demon- strated that it is due to the action of a parasitic virus which, under appropriate conditions, can be transferred mechanically. Symptoms of the disease may be masked during the incidence of air temperatures above 80° F., thus indi- cating a possible reason for the prevalence of the disease under field conditions during the cooler months of the year. A number of suggestions are made with a view to mini- mising losses experienced as a result of the occurrence of the disease. LITERATURE CITED. Allen, W. J. 1901. The deterioration of passion vines and fruit. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 12:248-250. 192%. The passion fruit. N.S.W. Dept. of Agriculture Leaflet 7 pp. Artschwager, Ernst. 1924, Studies on the potato tuber. Jour. Agric. Research, 27:828. 1923. Occurrence and significance of phloem necrosis in the Irish potato. Jour. Agric. Research, 24:237-245. Bewley, W. F. 1923. Mycological Report. Eighth Ann. Report Cheshunt Exper. and Res. Stat. Herfordshire (1922): 24-45. (Abstracted in Rev. Appl. Mycology, 2:489). 10. ALS ie 13. 14. WOODINESS OF PASSION FRUIT. 97 Cobb, N. A. 1901. Woodiness of passion fruit. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., 12:407-418. Elmer, O. H. 1925. Transmissibility and pathological effects of the Mosaic disease. Iowa Agr. Exp. Stn. Research Bul. 82, pp. 39-91. Johnson, James. 1922. The relation of air temperature to the mosaic disease of potatoes and other plants. Phytopathology, 12:438-440. Magee, C. J. P. 1927, Investigation on the Bunchy Top disease of the banana. Commonwealth of Australia, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Bul. 30, 64 pp. McKinney, H. H. O27. Quantitative and purification methods in virus studies. Jour. Agric. Research, 35:13-38. Pittman, H.. A. 1927. Spotted wilt of tomatoes. Commonwealth of Australia, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research Jour., 1:74-77. Plakidas, A. G. SP Strawberry Xanthosis (Yellows) an insect- borne disease. Jour. Agric. Research, 35:1057-1090. Tompkins, C. M. 1925. Effect of intermittent temperatures on potato mosaic. (Abstract.) Phytopathology, 15:46. Wilcox, R. B. 1926. Observations on masking of raspberry mosaic by high temperature. (Abstract.) Phytopathology, 16:80. G—July 4, 1928. 98 Plate 1. Fig. Plate 2. Fig. Plate 3. Fig. Plate A. Fig. Fig. Po NM a 10: It. R. J. NOBLE. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Normal mature passion fruit. Normal mature passion fruit after slight drying. Woody passion fruit. Woody passion fruit showing cracking of the rind. (All natural size.) Upper: Woody passion fruit cut across. Lower: Normal passion fruit cut across. x= xs Transverse section of outer portion of pericarp of normal passion fruit. x55. Transverse section of outer portion of pericarp of Woody passion fruit. x60. Terminal shoot of passion vine severely affected with the Woodiness disease. 3. Terminal leaves of passion vine, (left) healthy, (right) affected with the Woodiness disease. x %. Mature leaf of passion vine affected with Woodi- ness, showing puckering of tissues between the veins. 2. Passion vine seedlings 2 months after commence- ment of an infection test. (Left) Check healthy. (Right) Three plants affected with the Woodiness disease. Xd Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate I, Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Plate IT. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXI1., 1928. 20 % e - OIL LTS. Journal Royal Society of N.S. W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate IIT. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIL., 1928. Plate IV. Fig. 10. BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 99, BROWN: ROT OF FRUITS, AND ASSOCIATED DISEASES, IN AUSTRALIA. Part 1. Hisrory oF THE DISEASE AND DETERMINATION OF THE CAUSAL ORGANISM. By T. H. Harrison, B.Sc.Agr. (With Plates V-IX and one Text-figure.) (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, August 1, 1928) INTRODUCTION. Brown Rot is a limiting factor in production of drupe and pome fruits in many parts of the fruit growing world, including the temperate eastern and south-eastern fringe of Australia. This is due to the following facts :— (1) It has enormous potentialities for wholesale destruction of fruit approaching maturity in the orchard, in transit, in the markets and in the retail shops. (2) It is associated with serious twig blighting of susceptible varieties of several fruits. (3) It is associated with ‘‘blossom blighting’’ and resultant crop shrinkage or failure. (4) Under certain conditions, it is extremely diffi- cult to control. Brown Rot is a disease which cannot escape detection, and hence we find that, as early as 1796, Persoon (34) wrote of this disease causing rotting of English plums, peaches and French pears in Europe. Throughout the 19th century, other pathologists drew attention to the disease. ‘Contributions were made by Ehrenberg, 1818 (18), 100 T. H. HARRISON. Bonorden, 1851 (7), Hallier, 1876 (22), Schroter, 1893: (42), Frank and Kruger, 1899 (20), Sorauer, 1899 (44), and Woronin, 1900 (53) in Europe: and by Peck, 1880: (33), Smith, 1889 (43), and Pollock, 1900 (36) in America. Early in the 20th century came a new era of Brown Rot: study. In 1902, Norton (29, 30) in America, rediscovered the apothecial stage of the responsible organism. Since: then many authors have assisted in accumulating the present considerable store of knowledge concerning the organism and the disease it causes. A few of the more: important were Aderhold and Ruhland, Eriksson, and Wormald in Europe; and Norton, Reade, Pollock, Matheny, Jehle, Bartram, Conel, Valleau, Cooke, Brooks and Cooley, Willaman, Ezekiel, Barss, Roberts and Dunegan, and Rudolph in America. The object of this paper is to present certain fundamental considerations in connection with Brown Rot in Australia. HIstTorRIcAL—THE DISEASE IN ANSTRALIA. From the earliest days of settlement in this 140 year old colony, fruit growing has occupied a prominent position. With the first fleet, Governor Phillip brought to these shores fruit trees which he obtained from England, Rio de Janiero, and The Cape. Surprising was the facility with which the introduced fruits grew in the new country, where practically no indigenous edible fruits existed. Stone fruits apparently thrived, for in 1803 Caley (8) reported ‘‘the fruit that had succeeded beyond expectation was the peach’’. In 1807 Luttrell (28) wrote that the principal fruits growing included peaches, apricots, nectarines and plums. In the early twenties of last century Alan Cunningham was so impressed with the excellence of the peaches and the ease with which they could be grown, that he seattered seeds in suitable positions on his exploratory trips inland. At this time commercial fruit growing was BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 101 mainly restricted to the Ryde and neighbouring districts along the Parramatta River, within easy reach of the only market—Sydney. As settlement spread, and transport facilities increased, the area devoted to fruit growing extended. By the ’eighties, fruit growing was well dis- tributed over the County of, Cumberland and in its neigh- bourhood, as far as Kurrajong and Penrith on the west and Gosford on the north—approximately within a 45 miles radius of Sydney. During this developmental period many orchards, of stone fruits particularly, were planted by hard-working men. Not only was good land cheap, abundant and easy to obtain, but labour costs were low. In many eases, how- ever, the orchardist had little or no knowledge of fruit growing, and paid no regard to the limitations of a purely local market. As a natural consequence production out- distanced demand to such an extent that many of the orchards, particularly the older ones, became unprofitable. In many cases these orchard lands were bought by specu- Jators, companies, ete., for subdivision purposes. The result ‘was the same. Not only was no attention given to the trees, but the fruit, in many cases, was not harvested. Into this chaotic state of affairs the Department of Agriculture was born in 1890. One of its earliest actions ‘was the appointment of Dr. Cobb as consulting pathologist for fruitgrowers and other farmers. In 1897 Dr.:Cobb (9) drew a vivid picture of the menace that over 10,000 acres ‘of abandoned orchards situated within 25 miles of Sydney ‘were to the healthy trees of the genuine fruitgrower in New South Wales. Dr. Cobb recognised that the climate of Sydney, with its rainfall of 48 inches well distributed through the year, was ideal for the development of fungi causing fruit diseases. His appeal for the destruction of ‘the trees was without avail, for no legislation existed to 102 T. H. HARRISON. enforce the destruction of the trees in these areas. In fact not until the enlightened days of 1924 (4) was adequate: provision made for registration of all orchards and the: destruction of neglected trees. The Introduction of “Brown Rot.” The neglected and abandoned orchards contained a large: quantity of stone fruit trees. To the ideal propagating eround thus provided the Brown Rot organism was in-. troduced in the nineties of last century. McAlpine (28) was the first in Australia to recognise the disease. He collected infected apricots from near Melbourne, Victoria, in 1896. In 1898 Allen et al. (8) published a brief description of the disease. This is the first one published in Australia, but it is not clear from the context, that the- disease had been seen in this country. In 1902 McAlpine: (28) published a popular account of the disease and a technical description of the fungus responsible. He stated. that the organism was found on peaches, plums, apricots. and cherries, and that it caused not only rotting of the fruit but also blighting of the twigs and withering of the blossoms. He recognised that warm, moist weather favoured the development of the fungus. The next mention of the disease is by Cobb (10), who. in January, 1904, wrote, ‘‘The Brown Rot has come under notice in this State (N.S.W.) from time to time for a number of years, but it seems that it is only during our: moist seasons or in moist districts that it is to be feared.’”’ It appears to have been common on all stone fruits, for he- stated, ‘‘The disease appears with us to be quite as common on the cherry as on any other fruit, and the damage done: is quite considerable. ”’ For the next few years nothing was written of the disease, but with characteristic virulence it made its. presence felt in 1908. Froggatt (21) in 1909 wrote, ‘‘ This. BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 103 disease appeared very suddenly in many different districts just before Christmas (1908) . . . and there was a wide- spread infestation all through the orchards along the Hawkesbury River. Early in January the trees were covered with dead branches and dried-up fruits, but the disease had stopped spreading due to excessively hot weather just after the New Year. The nectarines suffered particularly . . . a number of trees had died. Peaches were affected in the same manner though less severely, while in the Japanese plums the fruits only were rotted.’’ In the late summer of 1910 Johnston (25) wrote, ‘‘The commonest fruit disease in our markets just now is the 3rown Rot, produced by . . . Monilia fructigena. This parasite occurs on the following fruits in New South Wales, viz., peach, nectarine, ordinary plum, Japanese plum, cherry, apple and pear, especially on the first four named.”’ Photographs of progressive stages of the rot in peaches and nectarines are shown. The epidemic is ascribed to ‘“warm, moist weather which prevailed.’’ The next mention of the disease is by Allen (2), who in January, 1912, wrote, ‘‘This fungus disease has shown up earlier this season and in a more virulent form than for 2, many years.’’ A strong warning is issued to growers about the necessity for thorough treatment to check the disease. Season 1913-14 was exceptionally dry and thus we find that Brown Rot was innocuous, but in season 1914-15 a serious epidemic was experienced. Darnell Smith (15) wrote in 1915, ‘‘There is no doubt that Brown Rot is the most serious disease of stone fruits in this State as it is in the rest of Australia and elsewhere. . . . While every season there is more or less rot present, the season just closing, owing to exceptional weather conditions, has been a very disastrous one for many orchardists. Peaches, plums, nectarines and cherries have all been severely 104 T. H. HARRISON. attacked. In one orchard it is estimated that 1,200 cases of cherries were lost. . . . During the months of Decem- ber, 1914, and January, 1915, there was a succession of hot, humid days with occasional showers and cloudy days.’’ Meteorological data are presented from which it is seen that the spring months, September and October, had 7 inches rain above normal and that in December 43 inches rain above normal fell. In the same season in Victoria specimens were received from many different fruit growing centres, but it was not until 1918 that a serious epidemic swept through the orchards south of the Divide in Victoria. In that year in two orchards alone in one district near Melbourne £7,000 worth of peaches were destroyed and the local peach cannery was not able to operate. Other serious epidemics in the southern State occurred in 1922 and 1923, when losses experienced were exceptionally heavy in cherries and plums. In 1924 the first epidemic occurred in districts north of the Divide, but the disease had first made its appearance there in 1921.* The history of the disease in N.S.W. continues as follows: Spinks (45) in 1917 wrote, ‘‘The season 1916-17 will long be remembered by fruit growers as one of the worst experienced—due to heavy crops, low prices and ‘Brown Rot’. . . . Fully 30% of the season’s crop was lost in consequence of the ravages of ‘Brown Rot’.’’ Season 1917- 18 was also favourable to Brown Rot, for Darnell-Smith (16) in 1918, in giving notes on some experiments for the control of Brown Rot in transit, remarked, ‘‘ Fortunately, as far as the experiment was concerned, Brown Rot was very prevalent.’’ The next season 1918-19 was very dry. During the six months, August to January, only 5 to 7 inches of rain fell, of which less than 24 inches fell during * From a report by Mr. S. Fish, Asst. Pathologist, Dept. of Agric., Victoria. aoal ecaiil BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 105 -the eritical months of December and January. Brown Rot, although present, did practically no damage. In 1919-20, however, favourable conditions for the fungus returned ‘once more. During the critical months 8 to 10 inches of rain fell and extensive damage resulted. It is estimated that in some districts that year the losses amounted to 50% of the stone fruit crop, while apples, pears and quinces were also attacked. The next season (1920-21) was one of phenomenal rainfall. During December and January 16 to 19 inches of rain fell. Fruit, which was cracked by the rain, was readily attacked by the Brown Rot organism, -and losses in apricots, plums, nectarines and peaches were -again very heavy. In the spring of 1921 the apothecial stage of the causal -organism was, for the first time in Australia, found near Sydney (28). The season which followed was at times ‘very favourable to Brown Rot. Abnormally moist weather ‘was experienced during the latter part of December and -early January. At this time much of the early stone fruit crop was approaching maturity. In many eases orchardists in the neighbourhood of Sydney lost heavily. These three “seasons of heavy Brown Rot losses were followed by several years with very little damage resulting from Brown Rot. With season 1927-28 a return to conditions favourable ‘to Brown Rot was experienced. Heavy losses of fruit in the orchard, in transit and in the markets have ‘occurred. In many orchards the twig-blighting has been particularly severe fin nectarines and peaches and to a lesser extent in apricots and plums. It is obvious that the severity of Brown Rot infestation in fruit growing -areas of N.S.W. depends on prevailing climatic conditions. ‘The results of an attempt to correlate climatic conditions -and Brown Rot infestation will be published later. The rainfall registrations quoted above apply only to the fruit growing areas within approximately 45 miles of Sydney, New South Wales. 106 T. H. HARRISON. Present Geographical Range in Australia. From information gathered from many sources the: present approximate distribution of Brown Rot in Austraha has been determined. In Queensland Brown Rot occurs. ‘‘in the Stanthorpe district, the only locality where tem- perate fruits are grown to any extent’’.* In New South Wales it appears to be present wherever stone fruits are: erown throughout the coast and tableland areas. oO—NS. cinerea (Y) and local fungus (M) on opposite sides. 5, 6—Local fungus (M) and Monilia fructigena (F) on opposite sides. Controls were established. Detailed observations of the rots were made at close intervals until 12/5/’22 when the experiment was dis- continued. | The controls at this time were still healthy. A summary of the observations follows :— (1) The local Brown Rot fungus produced a black rot with small greyish to fawn pustules pro- duced along the cut surface of the fruit and to a small extent over the rotted areas (Figs. b. and 3, Plate 4). ERRATA. On Page 120, last line, for Figs. b and 3, Plate 4, read Figs. b and c, Plate VIII. On Page 12], 5th line, for Plate 4 read Plate VIII. | a Vr 7 = —_ ~ a = = = ’ 2 - —- - { sa é ~ 3 3 i ie vba intone apa BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 121 (2) Monilia fructigena produced a more rapid brown rot with abundant large buff-coloured dome-shaped pustules arranged in zones all over the surface. Some nigrescence later (Fig. b., Plate 4). (3) Sclerotinia cinerea produced the slowest brown rot, with ash-grey conidial tufts along the cut surface, but no nigrescence. Experiment No. 4. Fresh Apples. This experiment varied only from No. 3 in that each of the three fungi :— Sclerotinia cinerea (England) (Y) Monilia fructigena (England) (F) Local Brown Rot organism (M) ‘was inoculated into each of three apples at approximately equal distances around the girth. Controls were established and frequent observations made. It was hoped by this means to reduce to a minimum the influence of varying environmental conditions. The three fungi behaved as in the previous experiment. ‘They are vividly distinct when grown alongside one another on the same apple. Experiment No. 5d. Tomato Inoculation. The tomatoes selected were firm, red and unblemished. They were surface sterilised by bathing in alcohol and ‘washing in distilled water. They were inoculated by inserting loops of conidia into cuts made in the surface. The inoculum was obtained from fresh potato plugs. Two tomatoes were inoculated with the local Brown Rot organism (M), two with Monilia 122 T. H. HARRISON. fructigena (F) and two with Sclerotinia cinerea (Y).. Controls were established. Detailed observations of each tomato were made at close: intervals and the following final conclusions drawn :— (1) All three strains of organisms will produce a (2 nS" firm rot in tomatoes. In all eases this rot is: brown at first. The rot caused by the local organism finally turns black, but that caused by the other two remains brown. All three strains produce, on the tomato, the fruiting bodies typical of the strain. The local organism (M) produced abundance of fawn- gsrey pustules over a dark surface. There was: no surface mycelial growth. Monilia fructigena (F') produces abundance of large buff pustules accompanied by a mass of aerial hyphae. Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) produces the distinct ash-grey conidial tufts accompanied by a fine mycelial mat over the infected area. Experiment No. 6. Persimmon Inoculation. Persimmons (Diospyros kaki var.), just ready to eat, were sterilised by bathing in 95% alcohol and washing in distilled water. With sterile scalpels the letters M, F and Y were made in the sides of the sterilised persimmons and into the cuts were inserted loops of conidia taken from: fresh cultures on prunes. The persimmons were inoculated as follows :— (1) both sides with the local organism (M); (2) both sides with Mona fructigena (F) ; (3) both sides with Sclerotinia cinerea (Y); (4) opposite sides with the local organism (M) andi Momla fructigena (F) ; _ —— BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 123: (5) opposite sides with the local organism (M) and Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) ;. (6) opposite sides with Monilia fructigena (F) and. Sclerotinia cinerea (Y). The inoculations were performed and controls established on 18th May, 1922. Detailed observations were made periodically. The following briefly summarises the results :— All three strains used will infect and grow on ripe persimmon. The rate of growth is extremely slow. Hach strain fruits abundantly on this medium. (1) The local organism (M) fruited typically. The conidial tufts were small, fawn coloured and very abundant.. Extreme nigrescence was produced. (2) Monilia fructigena (F) produced an abundance of large, loosely packed, dome-shaped, light buff pustules. A much slower nigrescence was produced. The firm nature: of the rot produced is striking, for, in many cases, the uninfected part of the fruit and the controls were shrink- ing while the infected part retained its shape. (3) Sclerotinia cinerea (Y) produced no nigrescence and was much slower in rotting the fruit. Ash-grey tufts were: produced in abundance along the cut surface and over the infected area. It can be seen that the foregoing experiments established definitely that the common Brown Rot organism found in Australia was neither Sclerotinia fructigena (Pers.) Schrot. nor 8. cinerea (Bon.) Schrot. (English form). Its behaviour in the inoculation experiments and its: growth in culture indicated that it was identical with the American organism (8S. fructicola). A series of experiments was conducted to determine this: point. A selection of those experiments follows :-— 124 T. H. HARRISON. | Expervment No. 7. Quince Inoculation. Quinces, of approximately the same stage of maturity -and as free from blemishes as possible, were selected. They were surface sterilised by bathing in 95% alcohol -and washed in freshly distilled water. Twenty-four were then inoculated with the local Brown Rot organism (Ascospore strain). Twenty-four with the American organism, S. fructicola. Twenty-four with Monilia fructigena from Wye, Eng- land. Twenty-four with Sclerotinia cinerea from the same source. The inoculum was obtained from 10 days old cultures on potato plugs and consisted of a loop of conidia in each ease. A wedge of quince was cut out with a sterilised scalpel and the inoculum placed beneath this wedge—the wedge being lfted momentarily with a sterilised needle. Two inoculations were made on each quince. When inoculated, the quinces were placed in a saturated atmosphere in the glasshouse. The inoculations were performed and controls established ‘on 22nd May, 1922. Detailed records of the progress of the rots were kept. ‘The following summarises the information thus obtained: All the inoculations were effective, resulting in typical brown rot lesions. Local Sclerotinia. The rot developed quickly, and nigrescenece was very marked, developing rapidly. Grey to fawn conidial tufts were very abundant. These were mostly small, and at times confluent, in some cases arranged in well defined ERRATA, On Page 125, 2nd line, for Plate 4 read Plate VIII. Same Page, 17th line, for Plate 4 Fig. a, read Plate VIII. Fig. a. be) BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 125- zones. They appeared very soon after rotting commenced.. (Plate 4, Figs. d.e.) American Sclerotima. This was inseparable under the conditions of the experi- ment from the local Sclerotinia. Sclerotuna cinerea (England). The rot was not so rapid as above. Nigrescence was absent, the rotted fruits remained entirely brown. Tufts. of aerial hyphae developed some time after the rot com- menced, but no conidia were produced until the rot was. well advanced. The sparse conidial tufts were ash-grey. Momlva fructigena (England). The rot developed very rapidly, but nigrescence was not so intense as that produced by the Australian Sclerotinia. Very large aerial hyphal masses were produced. These soon were covered with the buff coloured conidial tufts. (Plate 4, Fig. a.) The nature of the mummified fruit produced is interesting. Those of the Australian and American strains were hard, dense black and much shrivelled—deeply furrowed and ridged. Those of both Sclerotima cinerea (England), and Monilia fructigena were not nearly so Sshrunken—the outline of the quince being maintained. The brown colour of the S. cinerea mummy readily separated it from that of M. fructigena, which was black. Experiment No. 8. Blossom Blight. In September of 1922, an experiment was conducted to determine the relative virulence of the Australian strains of the Brown Rot organism and the American Sclerotima, in attacking plum blossoms. Conidia for the inoculations were obtained from young cultures on potato plugs. Two strains of the local organism 126 T. H. HARRISON. (one ascosporous and the other conidial), and one Ameri- can strain were used. Three methods of inoculation were employed. (1) Loop.—tn this method a sterile platinum loop, after being dipped in sterile water, was brought into contact with tufts of conidia, and the resultant loop of spores transferred to the stigma of the flower. (2) Prick.—In this method the ovary was pricked with ‘a sterile needle, which was placed in sterile water, touched on conidial tufts and inserted into the opening previously made at base of ovary. (8) Spray.—l10 ees. of sterile water were added to a tube containing a heavily sporulating plug of potato, and the resultant spore suspension transferred to a small bottle containing 40 ecs. sterile distilled water. A scent spray previously sterilised by immersion in 90 per cent. alcohol was used to convey the spores to blossoms. The clumps of flowers were selected as far apart as pos- sible to offset the danger of contamination. Immediately after inoculation, each clump was enclosed in waxed trans- lucent paper bags, and a label attached to the base of the clump. All possible care was taken to perform the inoculations in as aseptic a condition as possible. Controls were established. Detailed observations were made periodically. Briefly, the results were as follows :— (1) Loop inoculation. All three strains caused blossom blighting. No difference could be noted between the strains in their ultimate effect, although the Australian strains were more rapid in their action. Conidia were produced on rotted blossoms which were browned. From 80 to 100 per cent. of the flowers in various groups became infected. hel bo | BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 12 (2) Prick inoculation. The same effect was produced in this case as in that of ‘the Loop inoculation, except that the percentage of infec- tion was higher. Conidial production was variable. (3) Spray inoculation. Infection in this instance was from 60 to 80 per cent., but possessed the same features as those of Loop inoculation. Controls in all cases were healthy, setting fruit in a normal manner. Experiment No. 9. Apple Inoculation. Trivett Seedling apples carefully selected as being of approximately the same state of maturity were picked and very carefully handled to avoid bruising. These were sur- face sterilised with 95 per cent. alcohol and rinsed in distilled water. The apples were inoculated by inserting conidia beneath a wedge of apple cut out with a sterile scalpel and lifted momentarily with a sterile needle. The inoculum in each ease was obtained from fresh cultures on sterile potato plugs. Two strains of the Brown Rot organism were used, e.g. : (1) The American Sclerotinia. (2) The Australian Sclerotinia—An ascospore strain obtained in September, 1922, from an apothecium arising from apple mummies. With each strain twenty-four apples were inoculated and placed in a saturated atmosphere in the glasshouse. Con- trols were established. Observations were made at close intervals until the infected apples were completely rotted and mummified. 128 T. H. HARRISON. A summary of the result is as follows :— (1) American Sclerotina—tIn every instance inocula- tion was successful, and the apples were completely rotted in 8 days. The rot was firm and at first brown. Nigres- cence did not develop to any extent until the fruit was com- pletely rotted. Small, rounded, grey to fawn, well defined pustules were fairly abundant over the rotted areas. At | times these were confluent, especially around the margins: of the wedges removed for the purposes of inoculation. As. the apples mummified they became black and the conidial. tufts assumed a bright fawn colour. (2) Australian Sclerotunia—The local strain differed only from the above in the greater abundance of conidial tufts. These were arranged in concentric rings over the whole surface of the rotted fruits. DISCUSSION. Concurrently with the experiments described above, the Australian and American strains of Sclerotima and many local Monilia strains were sub-cultured some hundreds of times on different media. Apothecia of the Australian organism were also available in large quantities, and the author was enabled to obtain measurements of asci and ascospores. As a result of the correlation of all available data, the author was convineed that the Brown Rot organisms common in America and Australia were identical. At that time (1922 and 1923), the author considered that while American pathologists recognised certain differences between the American form and Sclerotinia cimerea, the feeling was against the use of the term, SV. cinerea forma americana, as throughout the American literature the name S. cinerea was retained. Even in 1924 Roberts and Dunegan (39), after careful consideration of Petes 4 BROWN ROT OF FRUITS. 129 all available information, preferred to adhere to the name Sclerotinia cinerea (Bon.) Schrot, for the American Brown Rot fungus. Consequently, in 1923, the author felt justified in stating ‘. . 6/315 feet 172 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK. The above figures must be taken as mere approximations as the incompleteness of the section makes the determina- tion of actual figures impossible. 1.—The Andesites. Nelson’s Bay. A well-defined flow of andesite (No. 1 flow) outcrops at intervals along the south shore of Port Stephens from Nelson’s Bay to Corlette Point. This flow strikes about EK. 20° N. and dips 8. 20° E. at an angle of about 20°. The section adjoining the steamer jetty at Nelson’s Bay, in descending order, is as follows :— Conglomerate (with very large boulders) .. 100 feet Amdesite (No. 2 flow) ..°..4 \¢.')..0 42) a Conglomerate SO eo Qo ea Andesite (No. 1 flow) .. «.: .. 41... . oe Here the No. 1 andesite flow occurs right at sea level. The lower part is quite glassy, the glassy phase merging upwards into a lithic variety. The rock is a hornblende- pyroxene-andesite and is described in detail in a later section. The full thickness of this flow is not exposed, but it is at least 100 feet thick. The No. 2 flow is similar - in character to the No. 1 flow. The lower andesite gives a continuous outcrop westwards from the jetty to the eastern end of Dutchman’s Beach, then follows a sand flat, followed by a smaller outcrop at the western end of Dutchman’s Beach. From this point westwards nothing but sand can be seen until Corlette Point is reached. Here the andesite flow may be seen resting upon a bed of conglomerate, both dipping southwards. It is uncertain as to whether this flow represents the No. 1 or the No. 2 flow at Nelson’s Bay. If it is the No. 2 flow, then the No. 1 flow will be found here, not far below sea level, underlying the conglomerates above referred to. GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 173 Tomaree or South Head. A small outcrop of andesite occurs here at sea level on the west side of the headland, striking north and south, and dipping easterly. It is immediately overlaid by a massive toscanite flow. Yacaaba Headland (North Head). Here also, just at sea level, is an andesite flow outcrop- ping along the northern shore of the headland. This flow strikes E. 25° N. and dips 8S. 25° E., with a massive toscanite flow resting immediately above it. As the andesite flow extends below sea level, it 1s impossible to determine its true thickness. An interesting feature here is the occurrence of a bar of toscanite cutting across the andesite flow and containing fragments of andesite. The andesite occurring at the three abovementioned localities are probably all parts of one and the same flow, but it is difficult to reconcile the strike at Tomaree with that at Nelson’s Bay and at Yacaaba headland. Point Stephens Headland. Point Stephens headland is an island consisting entirely of andesite, joined to the mainland by a narrow sandspit which is awash at high tide. A small outcrop of Andesite also oceurs on the opposite mainland at the northern end of Fingal Head. This andesite is similar in character to that occurring at Nelson’s Bay. If part of a flow, it is higher in the series than the Nelson’s Bay flow. The shape of the outcrop, however, and the relation to the adjoining rocks is not suggestive of its being a typical sheet. We suggest that it may be, probably, an andesite lava cone extruded at the same time as the Nelson’s Bay flow, and afterwards surrounded and covered by the later toscanite and rhyolite flows and their associated sedimentary rocks, but the available evidence does not admit of proof one way or the other. 174 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK. A similar andesite voleaniec cone of Kuttung age, sur- rounded and covered by younger strata, and since partly re-exposed by the partial removal of the overlying strata, has been recorded as occurring at Blair Duguid, in the Hunter River Valley.s 2.—The Toscanites. Numerous and massive flows of -toscanite occur throughout the district, but as the outerops of these are isolated from one another by sand flats or by water, and as there has been, in places, considerable displacement of outcrops by faulting, it is somewhat difficult properly to eorrelate the various outcrops. There would appear to have been at least two distinct toscanite flows or groups of flows. These two groups are referred to respectively as (a) the Nelson’s Head-Yacaaba flow and (b) the Soldiers Point-Ghan Ghan group of flows. (a) The Nelson’s Head-Yacaaba Flow. Nelson’s Head. The whole of Nelson’s Head consists of toscanite extending from low water mark to the top of the hill on which the lighthouse stands. The strike is about E. 20° N. and the dip to the south. On the northern face of the headland the rock at sea level is entirely glassy for a thickness of from 10 to 15 feet. Upwards, this glassy phase merges into a lithodal phase, the latter continuing to the top of the hill. The base of the flow is below sea level, but the thickness is not less than 100 feet. Fly Pont. This is a low headland occurring to the west of Nelson’s Head. A similar occurrence of toscanite occurs here, with a glassy selvedge at the base of the flow, but this glassy phase is less well marked, and the flow, as a whole, is not so thick, much having probably been removed by denuda- GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 1795 tion. The base of the flow here is, however, exposed, and at low water a bed of conglomerate may be seen underlying the toscanite. This is similar in character to the con- glomerate which overlies the andesite at Nelson’s Bay. A dip fault probably occurs between Fly Point and Nelson’s Head, which has displaced the strata to the north on the east side of the fault. Yacaaba Headland (North Head). The sequence of strata in this headland is given in fig. 1. It will be seen that the Toscanite flow here rests directly upon the andesite flow and has a thickness of about 1,000 feet. The toscanite flow here has a glassy selvedge at its base similar to that at Nelson’s Head. The most interesting feature here is a dyke or neck of toscanite SEA LEVEL Fig. 1.—Sketch section through Yacaaba Headland. A, Limestone with associated Tuffs; B, Conglomerates; C, Andesite; D, Toscanite. H, Fault. which cuts through the underlying andesite flow. In the toscanite are numerous rounded fragments of a more basic rock which is much altered but which appears to have been derived from the Andesite. Whether neck or dyke, this would undoubtedly appear to be an opening through which the overlying toscanite found its way to the surface. As has already been pointed out, this toscanite overlies the andesite at Yacaaba and Tomaree. No andesite is exposed at Nelson’s Head or Fly Point, but may well be below sea level at these points. No outerop of this toscanite flow can be found imme- diately above the andesites which extend from Nelson’s 176 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK. Bay to Corlette Point. The flow may have pinched out ‘in this direction, or if it occurs, its outcrop is covered by recent sand deposits. The fact that the flow is about 1,000 feet thick at Yacaaba Head and only about 40 feet thick at Fly Point suggests that it thins rapidly in a westerly direction. The great thickness of toscanite at Yacaaba may, of course, be due to the coalescence of the Nelson’s. Bay flow with some of the overlying toscanite flows of that locality. (b) The Soldiers Point-Ghan Ghan Toscamtes (No. 2 Belt). Lying to the south of Nelson’s Bay and extending from the sea coast westwards to Scamander Bay there is a belt of isolated hills all consisting of toscanite. The strike of this line of hills is approximately east and west. After crossing Scamander Bay, this toscanite belt is picked up again on the western side of the bay at Round Head, and continues from there in a north-north-west direction to Soldiers Point, as may be seen from the map. The various islands adjacent to Soldiers Point, including Middle Island, consist of the same rock. ‘Toscanite also occurs on the north shore of Port Stephens opposite to Soldiers Point, very massive outcrops occurring here on either side of Fame Cove. This great belt of Toscanite undoubtedly includes a number of separate lava flows. At its eastern end the double line of hills suggests at least two massive lava flows. Throughout the whole belt the rock from all the outcrops is similar in character and looks lke a typical Quartz-Porphyry. It also closely resembles the toscanites occurring at Nelson’s Head and at North Head. The numerous outcrops in this toscanite belt are separated from one another by sand dunes and sand flats, and no associated sedimentary strata are visible, so that no direct observations of either dip or strike could be made. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIT., 1928. Plate XIV. Fig. a. Raised Boulder Beach (Present day beach centre-left), Morna Point. Fig. 6. Raised Boulder Beach, Morna Point. ” = Meare cellos scstep im 0 tee edn, Ee aes Boat Tyeient oma Mae . Plate XV. @) ° 192 Lodge an fo) W S ‘nal Royal Society of N. Jows ‘prop ddIvULO T, JO YINOS 4Svod-vag ‘S|[IF] o@lUwVoso T, pues acer AN Mayen Wi esau Sion mc serene ks Ae SY GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. LE 3.—The Rhyolites. These lava flows outcrop in the southern part of the area mapped and form a belt whose outcrop curves sympa- thetically with that of the No. 2 toscanite belt. Outcrops occur on the sea coast (a) at Fingal Head and (b) at Morna Point, and further outcrops occur at Bob’s Farm on the east side of Tilligherry Creek, and at The Gibbers on the west side of Tilligherry Creek. Snapper Island, in the west part of Port Stephens, is probably a continua- tion of this belt. Fingal Head. At the northern end of Fingal headland there occurs an outcrop of andesite, previously referred to. Im- mediately overlying this is a rhyolite lava flow, the outcrop extending from here to the southern end of Fingal Head, a distance of about 160 chains. The actual thickness of this flow cannot be measured, but it is something more than 200 feet. Morna Point. The outcrop here is exactly similar to that at Fingal Head, and this outcrop appears to have been separated from that at Fingal Head by a large dip-fault which has heaved the strata on its east side to the north. The rock both here and at Fingal Head is indistinguishable in hand Specimens from the toscanites already referred to. At Morna Point the rhyolite flow appears to be dipping a little east of south. Bob’s Farm (Fenningham’s Island). Between here and Morna Point is an extensive swampy sand fiat with no outcrops. The outcrop at Bob’s Farm occurs at the western edge of this flat and at the eastern side of Tuilligherry Creek, and the rock here has been quarried for road-making purposes. At this locality the L—Septemter 5, 1928, 178 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK. rhyolite is underlain by well-stratified tuffs and cherty shales, the latter containing the fossil plant Rhacopterts. Underlying this again is another rhyolite flow. The Girbbers. This locality occurs on the other side of Tilligherry Creek, immediately west of Bob’s Farm, and gives one of the best geological sections of the district. (See fig. 2.) The details of this section in descending order are as follow :— Thickness. Rhyolite (No, 3 flow) ..2. ox 12 90) 2sUeeas Tufts SS aes am re Le Cherty shales ah baer wan eee eee Tuttis and Conglomerates... .. ..) 2 gels BRhyolite (No. 2 flow) ..., ... .: ... 220 se Tuffs and Conglomerates .., ... 1. sco je eee Tuffs Je a a tae Sy es oral eee Rhyolite (No. 1 Ane SE i: ele ec ee Tuffaceous sandstones with fossil Ante so vat NOOO T Conglomerates wes ty cele vubeng — U/dley Walelee. © | 2S aaanmees Cae Total thickness .. 2,270 feet It will be seen that there are three distinct rhyolite lava flows here. The whole succession of strata at this locality is very similar to that which occurs in the Paterson district. The top rhyolite flow would be the equivalent of that which occurs in the railway cutting at the Paterson railway station. 4.—The Sedimentary Rocks. The Burinds Series. Strata of Burindi (Lower Carboniferous) age are extensively developed in the Pindimar district on the northern side of Port Stephens, but these will not be described here; the occurrence of probable Burindi strata GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 179 occurring at Yacaaba headland might, however, be referred to here. These are shown in the section in fig. 1. These strata strike EH. 35° N., have a steep dip, and consist of a massive bed of conglomerate overlying a thin bed of tuffaceous limestone. The lmestone is very impure, contains crinoid stems, and is lithologically similar to limestones which occur in the Burindi series in other parts of the district. The conglomerates which overle the lime- stone are very massive and are crowded with pebbles from 6 to 8 inches in diameter. This conglomerate may possibly be the equivalent of the Wollarobba conglomerate which. in another part of the district, occurs at the base of the Kuttung series. Strike faulting has brought these beds against the toscanite, which is relatively higher in the series, : SEA LEVEG eS or eae m7 PigeegSesH Conciomersien; D, Toftaccona Seniatones: H, Conglomerates: H, Alluvium. The Nelson’s Bay Conglomerates. These are associated with the Andesites which occur at Nelson’s Bay, already referred to. They show very little stratification and contain well-rounded boulders of all sizes up to 3 feet or even more in diameter. These boulders consist mainly of granites of various kinds, Quartz- Porphyry and Felspar-Porphyry. The material in which the boulders are embedded is very largely tuffaceous. At Corlette Point similar conglomerates occur, associated with the andesite there, but the boulders are relatively fewer in number. These Nelson’s Bay conglomerates are very similar in their lithological characters to the conglomerates which are associated with the andesites on the same horizon in the Kuttung series at Martin’s Creek, near Paterson. 180 Cc. A. SUSSMILCH AND WM. CLARK. The Gibbers. Particulars of the sedimentary rocks occurring here have already been given when referring to the rhyolite of the same locality. The occurrence in these of the fossil plant Rhacopteris (Aneimites) inequilatera proves that those strata belong definitely to the Kuttung series. These strata, with their associated rhyolite flows, correspond in character and horizon with what one of us (C.A.S.)3 has previously described as the Mt. Johnson series in the Paterson district, and they are quite similar to them in their lithological characters. The Anna Bay Bores. Some years ago several bores were put down in the southern part of this region for the purpose of prospecting for coal. Details of the strata penetrated by these bores are given by Sir T. W. E. David in his monograph on the Hunter River coalfield.t_ No. 1 bore, which is 24 miles west of Morna Point, after passing through 192 feet of recent alluvial deposits, penetrated 126 feet into a Quartz Felspar-Porphyry. This is evidently the Morna Point Rhyolite flow; the angle of its dip is given as 23°. The No. 2 bore, after passing through 192 feet of recent deposits, penetrated 257 feet of cherty shales alternating with tuffa- ceous conglomerates and tuffaceous sandstones. These strata dip 8.S.W. at an angle of 22° and apparently overlie the top rhyolite flow. The cherts contain the fossil plant Rhacopteris. 5.—Geological Structure. Reference to the map will show that the outcrops of the Kuttung Series form a great curve, convex to the south. In the western part of the area the strike of the strata is approximately N.N.W., and the dip westerly; from Corlette Point to Nelson’s Bay the strike is nearly east and west, and the dip southerly, while in the eastern part GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 181 of the area the strike is E. 20° N. to H. 30° N., and the dip S. 20° EK. to 8. 30° E. It is evident, therefore, that the general structure is that of a great plunging anticline, the axis of which strikes approximately north and south, with a pitch to the south. This conforms to the general geolo- gical structure of the carboniferous formation right along the southern margin of New England from the Pacific coast to Scone. The probable existence of faults has been referred to (a) at Nelson’s Head between West Point and Fly Point, (b) between Fly Point and Nelson’s Head, and (c) between Morna Point and Fingal Head; on the accom- panying geological map these faults have been joined up as shown, but, of course, this joining up is, to a large extent, conjectural. These faults are all dip faults. The existence of a strike fault has been suggested as occurring at North Head, as shown in fig. 1. This strikes about E. 30° N. II.—PETROGRAPHY. The Kuttung lava flows fall naturally into three distinct groups: (a) the andesites, (0) the toseanites, (c) the rhyolites, extruded (with perhaps one exception) in that order. 1.—The Andesites. These are all hornblende-pyroxene-andesites, and they may be divided into two varieties: (a) the glassy variety, (b) the lithoidal variety. a. The Glassy Andesite. This occurs at West Point, Nelson’s Bay, where it is found at the base of the lowest andesite flow; there is a similar occurrence at Corlette Point. Megascopic Characters.——The fresh rock is black in ‘eolour with a resinous lustre, and shows abundant pheno- erysts, of felspar, hornblende and pyroxene. 182 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG. Microscopical Characters.—The ground mass shows well- marked flow structure, with some spherulitic structure present in places, and in this groundmass is set an abun- dance of phenocrysts of plagioclase, hornblende and pyroxene, with a few crystals of quartz and biotite; the two latter are very rare. Occasional small areas occur which show hyalopilitic structure and smaller phenocrysts than in the average rock. In such areas the felspars are lath-shaped, with their long axes in the direction of flow. The plagioclase in general is tabular in habit and almost quite fresh with a composition close to Ab, An;. The hornblende also is quite fresh and frequently twinned. The pyroxene is less abundant than the hornblende. It. oceurs both as occasional phenocrysts and as quite small crystals included in the felspars. It is weakly pleochroic and has parallel or low extinction angles. It appears to be hypersthene. The iron ores are moderately abundant and occur both as inclusions in the larger phenocrysts and in the groundmass. An occasional small erystal of biotite may be seen, but this mineral is rare. Apatite is present as occasional small needles included in the felspar. In spite of the fact that the norm shows 31.2 per cent. of quartz, only very few phenocrysts of this mineral have been seen in the slides. A noticeable feature of the glassy andesites is the remarkable freshness of all the phenocrystic minerals. This is in marked contrast with the condition of the similar minerals in the lithoidal variety of andesite. b. The Lithoidal Andesites. These Andesites are similar in their characters from all the localities from which they have been found in the Port Stephens district. Megascopic Characters.——In hand specimens the rock is. dark blue in colour, showing abundant phenocrysts of GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 183 felspar, with less abundant phenocrysts of black ferro- magnesian minerals, Microscopic Characters——The groundmass is eryptocry- stalline and very fine-grained. Traces of what appears to have been a flow structure occur in places, but there is no evidence to suggest that the groundmass, as a whole, was originally glassy. The following minerals are present in order of abun- dance :—(1) Plagioclase, (2) Hornblende, (3) Pyroxene, (4) Magnetite. The plagioclase phenocrysts are tabular in habit, and abundant. Albitization is well marked, alteration having taken place along irregular lines and cracks. Occasionally some chloritization has taken place, but is not common. The hornblende shows undoubted resorption, and the margins of the crystals all have a very dark zone, probably due to the development of minute erystals of iron oxide. This is particularly noticeable in the microslides of the andesite from North Head. The pyroxene crystals are entirely replaced by chlorite, and it is now impossible to determine their true nature. An occasional phenocryst of quartz has been seen in some of the slides. An analysis of each of the two varieties of andesite is given in Table I; the specimens selected for analysis came from West Point, Nelson’s Bay. An important difference between the two rocks as shown by the analyses is in the relative proportion of the alkalies and lime. This is shown in the following table :— Port Stephens. Martin’s Creek. Glassy Lithoidal Glassy Lithoidal Variety Variety. Variety: Variety. CaO ee... 6.38 4,28 4.11 3.14 Nes Oar 2.20 3.39 3.99 4.41 OS See 0.66 3.02 M2 3.92 184 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG. The lower percentage of alkalies in the glassy rock is very marked. This is particularly so in the case of the potash, and, in order to make sure that no mistake had been made, the potash and soda in the glassy rock were re-determined. The percentage of lime, on the other hand, is noticeably higher in the glassy rock. The corresponding constituents of the glassy and lithoidal andesite from Martin’s Creek+ are given for comparison. These show a similar variation between the two rocks, but not to such a marked extent. The norms of the two Port Stephens rocks, as calculated from the analysis, are as follows :— Glassy Variety. lLithoidal Variety. 01 Ala ee ro 31.20 19.86 Orthoclase <..2 2) 08 Soe ees) WAM IGG <5 o's SRR A tees 18.34 28.82 PAMOFGNICC: ~ 02.2 = oe ee 29.74 17.79 Femic Minerals .... 7.92 8.01 Tiron Ores. ac) s «ee 4.14 4.17 On account of its alkaline content the glassy rock gives a much lower percentage of albite and orthoclase than does the lithoidal variety, and a correspondingly higher percentage of quartz. 2.—The Toscanites. These, like the andesites, fall naturally into two varieties: (a) a glassy variety, (b) a lithoidal variety. a. The Glassy Toscanite. This has been found only at the base of the oldest toscanite flow, and in each of the three localities at which it has been found, namely, Fly Point, Nelson’s Head and Yacaaba Head, it occurs just at sea level. The occurrence at Nelson’s Head ean be taken as typical of all three locali- | ties, and it is this rock which has been analysed. SiO, Al;0O, Fe;0, reO MgO CaO Na,O K,0 H;0 (100°c) -H,0 (100°c+) CO, TiO, ZrO, P.O, SO; Cl F S (FeS,) Cr,05 N10+-CoO MnO BaO SrO* i, Ov V30; CrO Less O=Cl1 Sp. Gr. GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. Table I. Analyses of Port Stephens Rocks, by W. A. Greig. III. Glass IV. Tos- canite We Tos- canite VI. Toscanite VII. 185 VIII. Toscanite] Rbyolite | Rhyolite —_—————$-——. | [| | Sitar a oF 71°72 | 73°90 _ SS | L______. f EE a | SSF eS OO I. II. eeae Andesite 63°17 | 63:92 15.10 | 1537 2°20 2°90 2°16 2°34 2°35 2°60 6°38 4°28 2°20 3°39 066 3°02 0°47 0:41 4°73 1-65 Absent! Absent 0 50 0:05 Absent} Absent 0°14 0°16 Absent! Absent 0-11 0:07 Absent; — s) Absent 0:10 0:07 0°03 0 04 Absent | Absent Present] __,, Tracet e Absent Pe 100°30 | 100°27 02 01 100°28 | 100°26 27524) 2°694 11°50 2°30 0°63 0°41 2°56 3°40 2°53 0°35 4°51 Absent 0°15 Absent 0:03 0:06 0°10 Absent 0°11 0°05 Absent Present Absent 3) 100°41 0-2 3°50 4°04 Localities.—I. *Spectroscopic Reaction. and IL., VIII., Morna Point. West Point, Nelson’s IV., Fly Point; V., Nelson’s Head; VI., 73°64 3°42 4°59 Bay ; 73°90 11°95 1°70 0°99 0°55 1°50 3°10 4°74, 0°21 1°37 Absent 0°20 Absent 0°05 Absent Tracet Absent 0:06 0°06 Absent Tracet Absent 100°38 100°38 2°613 73969) 74°74 12°65 11°89 1°85 1°50 0°40 0°27 0°50 0°83 0°64 0°74 3°18 2°96 5°07 5°23 0°45 0°60 1°33 1°14 Absent | Absent 0:20 0°17 Absent} Absent 0:07 0-02 Absent 0:02 Tracet 0°10 = Absent Absent ; Tracet | Tracet 0°04 0:07 Present) Absent Absent | Present ” Absent 100°34 | 100°28 *02 100°34 | 100°26 2611 2°600 III., fLless than 0°01% Nelson’s Head; Round Head; VII., Fingal Head; 186 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG. Megascopic Characters—The rock is black in colour when fresh, with a vitreous lustre, and contains an abun- dance of phenocrysts of quartz and felspar. Microscopic Characters.—The groundmass is quite glassy and displays a well-marked flow structure. In this ground- mass there is set an abundance of large phenocrysts of quartz, plagioclase, orthoclase and biotite. The quartz. phenocrysts are relatively large, show marked corrosion, and are frequently cracked and broken, but show no strain structure. The plagioclase is tabular in habit, is perfectly fresh and free from alteration, and displays well-marked albite twinning. It is an acid oligoclase with a composition of about Ab,» An;. Some of the plagioclase crystals are fractured. The orthoclase is quite fresh, but is less abun- dant than the plagioclase. Biotite is not nearly so abundant as the other minerals, and is also quite fresh. b. The Inthoidal Toscanite. This is the dominant lava of the district, individual flows ranging up to at least 1,000 feet in thickness. From all the many occurrences the rock is quite similar both in its megascopic and microscopical characters. Megascopic Characters—The colour of the mass varies. from pale pink to slate blue, according to the state of preservation; except where the rock has been quarried, it is difficult to obtain really fresh samples. This rock is. crowded with phenocrysts of quartz and felspar, the latter’ usually being red or pink, or more rarely white. In hand specimens the rock looks like a typical quartz-phorphyry. Microscopical Characters.—The groundmass is variable, usually eryptocrystalline to glassy, and some specimens, notably some from Soldiers Point, have a micro-crystalline geroundmass which consists of an aggregate of small erystals of quartz and felspar, sometimes showing micrographic GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 187 structure. Flow structure similar to that which occurs in the glassy variety is present in many specimens, and in some of the slides the rock appears to have been originally glassy and to have subsequently become more or less devi- trified. At Nelson’s Head there is no sharp line of demar- cation between the two varieties, the glassy variety merging upwards into the lithoidal variety. The phenocrysts. consist of quartz, plagioclase, orthoclase and biotite similar to those occurring in the glassy variety, except that all the minerals other than quartz show considerable alteration. The orthoclase is much kaolinized. The plagioclase exhibits. saussuritization and, much more rarely, ‘aolinization; in some slides the centre zones of some few crystals have been replaced by chlorite, but this is not common; the biotite is commonly bleached. The question as to whether the alteration of the felspars in the lthoidal lavas of the Kuttung series is deuteritic or not has been fully discussed by G. D. Osborne+ when describing these lavas from the Paterson district, and this question, therefore, will not be discussed here; but it is worthy of note that the alteration of the felspars in the lithoidal toscanites is in marked contrast to their freshness in the glassy toscanites. Com- plete analyses of the two varieties of toscanite are given in Table I, together with two partial analyses. It will be seen that the glassy variety is lower in soda and potash, but higher in lime than in the lithoidal variety, but it is. only in the case of the potash that the difference is well marked. The norms of the two varieties, as calculated from the analyses are as follows :-— Glassy Variety. lLithoidal Variety. UT) a 36.96% 34.44% WriMOClaSe sk... 15.00% 27.84% BCS ls ws sieve eee 28.82% 26.20% PeMOrtMIGe ok 8.62% 4.73% Femic Minerals ..... 2.74% 2.96% ton Ores i... 26.6... 2.96% 3.00% 188 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG. It will be seen that in both cases the plagioclase (oligoclase) preponderates over the orthoclase. The magmatic name of the glassy variety in the American classification is Tehamose. It might be pointed out, how- ever, that this rock falls almost on the border line which separates the orders columbare and britannare in that classification, and consequently it is very close to toscanose, the magma to which the lithoidal variety belongs. Both magmas are domalkalic and sodi-potassic. Some petrolo- gists would prefer to call these rocks Dellenites on account of the acid nature of the plagioclase. The lithoidal variety is not far removed from the Rhyolites (Liparose). 3.—The Rhyolites. The main rhyolite flow (No. 3 flow) occurring at Fingal Head, Morna Point and Tilligherry Creek is indistinguish- able in hand specimens from the toscanites. Under the microscope also the two rocks are quite similar, the only noticeable difference being a higher proportion of ortho- clase in the rhyolites. Two analyses of the rhyolite have been made, one taken from near the base of the flow at Fingal Head, the other taken from near the top of the flow at Morna Point. These analyses are shown in Table I. ‘The norms, as calculated from these two analyses, are as follows :— Fingal Head. Morna Point. Mwart,. Age see ee 34.14% 34.86 % Wrthoclase Weg een ee 29.46% 30.58% BASIE i.e aiavcsets oe wearer eee 27.24% 25.15% PNMON EGE! see oe ane Maes ee 3.05% 3.61% Meme Mamerals .. 9.3205... 2.89% 2.10% ron/Oxides: |. ¥ os: 4... eae LT a7 1.92% In the American classification the magmatic name would be Liparose, almost on the border line between Liparose and Omeose. In comparing these norms with that of the GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. 189 lithoidal toscanite, the only difference is a small increase in the proportion of orthoclase as compared with plagioclase in the rhyolites. | The other rhyolite flows occurring below the main flow at Tilligherry Creek have not been analysed, no specimens sufficiently fresh for that purpose being available. The No. 1 flow, which is pink in colour, consists mainly of a felsitic groundmass through which are scattered a few felspar phenocrysts. In the microslides the groundmass is seen to be eryptocrystalline, but part, if not all, of this sroundmass appears to have been originally glassy, with well-marked flow structure. The few felspar phenocrysts are much altered and consist mainly of plagioclase, although orthoclase is also present. The true nature of this rock has not been determined, it has only been placed with the rhyolites provisionally. The No. 2 flow from Tilligherry Creek, although somewhat finer grained, is in all respects similar to the main rhyolite flow (No. 3 flow), and does not need separate description. 4.—Sequence of Eruption of the Flows. This is left somewhat in doubt owing to the uncertainty as to the true nature of the mode of occurrence of the andesite which occurs at Stephens Head. As has already been pointed out, this occurrence may be either: (a) A lava cone of the same age of extrusion as the andesites at the base of the series, and which was. subsequently surrounded and finally submerged by the later toscanite and rhyolite flows, or (b) A lava flow poured out after the toscanites, but before the rhyolites. If the first interpretation is the correct one, then we have in the Kuttung Series of the Port Stephens district a series of lava flows beginning with andesites, followed 190 C. A. SUSSMILCH AND W. A. GREIG. ‘by toseanites and a final outpouring of rhyolites. The rocks analysed are arranged in this order in Table I, and an examination of the analyses will show the following points of interest :— | 1. The silica percentage shows a progressive increase ranging from 63.17 per cent. to 74.74 per cent. 2. The soda percentage remains fairly constant, but decreases shghtly towards the end of the series. 3. The potash shows a progressive increase ranging from 0.66 per cent. at the beginning of the series to 5.23 per cent. at the end of the series. 4. The basic oxides (CaO, MgO, and FeO) all show progressive decreases from the beginning to the end of the series. These facts would indicate that at the beginning of the Kuttung vulecanicity in this district the feeding reservoir contained a magma of andesitic composition, but that, as a result possibly of gravitational sinking of the more basic minerals, as cooling and crystallisation progressed, the magma in the upper part of the reservoir became pro- gressively more acid, and thus the eruption of andesites was followed later by the eruption of toscanites, and these later were followed by the eruption of the rhyolites. It is worthy of note that, soon after the close of the Kuttung period of vuleanicity, an extensive series of basic lavas (natrolite basalt) was erupted in this same district and forms part of the Lower Marine Series which overlie the Kuttung Series. These basalts may be taken to represent the basic portion which accumulated in the lower part of the magma reservoir, whose final eruption completed the cycle. If, on the other hand, the andesites of Stephens Head xepresent a lava flow poured out after the toscanites, then S jie byal Society of V.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate XVI, Hawks Nest SS a) Cabbage Tree yes Island = - > NORTH HEAD (Yacaaba) Bent Boondelbah N HO Island al Bay <=) SOUTH HEAD i Y (Tomeree) ab ion hS @ Shark. oN STEPHENS ~ 3 S aS ; Oe pt Burind/ beds and Wallarabba conglomerates. Andesites and associated strata Toscani€es a Rhyolites and associated strata paren Recent alluvium and sand dunes. ———— faults : SCALE OF MILES 0 ye) 1 2 4 Ken. Craigie. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. 7, ae) North Arm ach eS TEA GARDENS O Co ‘ i , OQ ue Ls SS UE 5O Duck Hole GreenPt. Gardenl. ———>=/* %, XG y Riv? BAROMA PT Fame Cove se ii FAME ?——<———> NORTH P® oe OneTreel.8 —. SOLDIER PT N. = NORTH HEAD oaky | STEPHENS 3 (aeaaba) a - KANGAROO Pt kh, / /_.NELSON HP te SOUTH HEAD 2, CORLETTE te (Tomeree) ROUND HP gb Ye ; aN jLSON BAY = Uo i Ganghan Hill @ Shark. ASSL ane ! POINT STEPHENS fesse ® Pig Island + [acne AnnaB ch eos SSR a aaa, meen tt -AO}-=> Seca 4 Mi ay ‘ 3tFE ttt H aad Toscani€es ; - ———— Faults Bight MORNA POINT d SCALE OF MILES castle fo} 2 1 2 New jes Cabbage Tree POR push &® Middle | Plate X VI, Island Little Bl. PACIFIC Burindi beds and Wallarabba conglomerates. Andesites and associated strata A ~Ahyolites and associated strata L_] Recent alluvium and sand dunes. 4 Ken. Craigie. Geological Map, Port Stephens District, Senekeeey cert eS orm ate teenagers copie a arenes co * TNR ic ee epee an Sere r) 4 be E lc caeceenle a ae mel oe ta st er suas minabaeeaiberahee’ sie agscee ps eme pein nee ART GEOLOGY OF PORT STEPHENS. roy we get the following order of extrusion for the Kuttung lavas: (1) andesites, (2) toscanites, (3) andesites, (4) rhyolites. This is a similar order of extrusion to that which occurs in the Kuttung Series at Eelah. So far as the Port Stephens area, however, is concerned, we are of opinion that interpretation (a) is the correct one and that the lavas became progressively more acid as they were erupted. REFERENCES. 1.—Geology of The Hunter River Coal Measures of N.S. Wales, by Prof. T. W. E. David, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. Memoir No. 4, Dept. of Mines, Sydney, 1907. 2.—Outline of the Main Topographic Features of N.S. Wales, by C. A. Sussmilch, F.G.S., F.T.C.(Syd.). Proc., Pan Pacific Science Congress, Australia, 1923. 3.—Sequence, Glaciation and Correlation of the Carboniferous Rocks of The Hunter River District, N.S. Wales, by C. A. Sussmilch, F.G.S., F.T.C., and Prof. T. W. E. David, C.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., F.R.S. Proc., Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. LIII., 1919. 4.—Geology and Petrology of the Clarencetown-Paterson District, Part IV., Petrography by G. Osborne, B.Sc. Proc., Linnean Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. L., p. 2, 1925. 5.—On the Hypersthene-Andesite of Blair Duguid, near Al- landale, N.S. Wales, by W. R. Browne, D.Sc., and H. P. White, F.C.S. Proc., Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. LX., 1926. 192 R. H CAMBAGE. THE OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. By R. H. Campacg, C.B.E., F.L.S. (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Sept. 5, 1928.) The outbreak of springs in New South Wales between the months of February and June usually passes unnoticed excepting during drought seasons, when various reports of the occurrence are made to the press; but if an increased flow of water is observed in any of the streams after even a very slight fall of rain, this increase is generally attributed to the rainfall and no remarks are made. The theory advanced in this paper is that at least ninety per cent. of these outbursts or stimulated flows which occur when no rain falls are caused by a decrease in evaporation or lowering of atmospheric temperature, and that the phenomenon is in evidence after the heat of summer has passed, or after a sudden drop in temperature for a few days, but is more noticeable in the absence of rainfall. A short note which I contributed on the subject was published in “‘The Surveyor’’ in June, 1897,* and in September, 1897, the late W. E. Abbott read a valuable paper on the question before this Society.t In both of these contributions the cause of the outbursts was attri- buted to diminishing evaporation. The object of the present paper is to record the result of further investiga- tions into the matter. *“The Surveyor,” 1897, 10, No. 6, 144. + This Journal, 1897, 31, 201. See also “Report on the Water Resources of the Hunter Valley,” 1908, by J. B. Henson, Assoc.M.Inst.C.E. (Hunter District Water Supply and Sewerage Board). The report was received after this paper was read. OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 193 My first observation on this subject was made in December, 1890, where there was a small swamp in the Walcha district, and every morning a little stream was flowing freely from it, but by each evening all water had disappeared from the tiny stream. I have noticed the same feature many times since then, and similar observa- tions have been made by bushmen on innumerable occasions. During a dry period in 1897, my assistant, Mr. R. G. Wilson, drew my attention to the fact that all the cases of increased flow which we had noticed during our survey- ing operations in the Bathurst to Harden district originated in swamps. | It does not appear that barometric changes of pressure cause these outbursts of springs, for, as Mr. Abbott points out, this would require a high pressure at the source of the spring and a low pressure at its outlet. It would not be possible to get this difference of pressure in such a short distance as that comprised in the length or width of one of these water-supplying swamps, which are often only a few hundred yards or, at most, a few miles in extent. The theory that the dry weather cracks the ground and releases impounded water is by no means universally accepted, because in an ordinary case the ground will not erack while it remains moist. Mr. Abbott cites the case of a surface dam, and states that while it contains any water the outside of the dam will not crack, even in dry, hot weather. On the other hand, Mr. E. T. Webb, of Bathurst, wrote to me in April, 1923, as follows:—‘‘In a dry time some years ago a crack came in the ground on the side of a hill about 8 miles from the town, and after a time moisture came up through the crack, and when the moisture had softened the ground the water commenced to run—this in M—September 5, 1928. “194 R. H. CAMBAGE. hot weather, and in a place where there had been no spring before.’”’ I do not know the local conditions surrounding this ease, but it is conceivable that a slight earth movement or partial landslide on the side of a hill might result in releasing some water, or cause its course to be diverted. Mr. Webb also wrote: ‘‘Now my theory is this, that in different localities the nature of soil and subsoil is different and therefore different causes operate. Here it is prin- cipally granite country with clay subsoil; hence, as a spring gets weak the small particles of granite which are coming along the channel gradually stop the opening until no water will percolate through; the water then commences to accumulate at the back until the pressure is sufficient to clear the opening.”’ No doubt something of this nature happens at times, but only in a small way, and is of a local nature; whereas an increase in the flow of various streams appears to be more or less of a regular character during some portion of the autumn. In reply to my question in March, 1928, the manager of Springfield, in the Orange district, stated that the water generally increases in Lewis Ponds Creek in or about May, even if no rain falls. I was informed that without any rain having fallen the ‘water commenced to flow in Molong Creek near the town of Molong, on the 9th or 10th April, 1923. Prior to this the creek had stopped running owing to dry weather. Springs and their Variation. On the western slopes of New South Wales, where many of these springs occur, there are three different sets of conditions. One is in the northern portion where the steeply-dipping rocks convey the rain-water westerly to a OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 195 great depth, where it is overlain by impervious strata, and impounded. This artesian water is reached by boring, ‘when it comes to the surface as the result of pressure. The second condition is found towards the foot of the western slopes, where rain-water disappears by soakage in fairly level country with a considerable amount of alluvium, and this water may not find an outlet, but as sub-artesian water may be brought to the surface by windmills or other methods of pumping. The third case, which is that now under consideration, is where the rain or snow falls on elevated country and then finds its way into the soil which acts as an under- ground reservoir, which in ordinary years is kept practi- eally full. The small outlets through which the water escapes are called springs, and while there is a quantity of water in the soil or reservoir these springs may continue to flow, even if no rain falls. Near the outlet the ground becomes spongy, and the water, to some extent by capillary attraction, rises to the surface and forms swampy areas of various dimensions. As the summer advances and evapo- ration increases, there often comes a time when the evapo- ration, which may continue day and night, claims all the water on the surface, and leaves none to flow into the stream below. The spring is then said to be dry. There are two conditions which may operate to start the spring flowing again. One is the falling of sufficient rain to replenish the reservoir so that it will be able to force out more water than can be at once evaporated, in which case some will flow away, and the occurrence will eall for no public remarks. The second ease is one that may happen with or without rainfall, and is caused by a lowering of atmospheric temperature with a consequent diminution of evaporation. When the outburst happens 196 R. H. CAMBAGE. in drought time, as the result of diminishing evaporation. only, there is considerable comment, and the phenomenon is regarded by some casual thinkers as an indication that the drought will soon terminate, and by others that it will continue. The little rills which issue from the various. springs and other moist places all unite, and cause a defi- nite flow in the streams into which they drain, and this. flow sometimes continues for very many miles. Should an intermittent spring, fed by rainfall and with- out a storage reservoir, be situated a great distance from its source of supply, the water might take some months following an underground course to reach the outlet, in which case it is possible that the outbreak would occur during a dry period without being the result of diminished evaporation. Evaporation. The late H. C. Russell, F.R.S. carried out a consider- able amount of investigation on the question of evapora- tion in New South Wales, and records an instance at Lake George in March, 1885, where in three days, while a nor- therly wind was blowing, the lake lost one and a half inches by evaporation.* Lake George is given as roughly 20 miles. long and 5 miles wide. Mr. Russell carried out various evaporation tests at Sydney during the year 1885. ‘‘Two dishes, each 8 inches deep and 2 feet on each side, that is, exposing 4 squars feet of surface, were used for the purpose of testing the amount of water evaporated from soil, grass covered and bare . . .The evaporation from these dishes was tested by weighing once a day.’’** The daily mean in inches for the year was, grass covered 0.083, bare earth 0.071, water 0.100. * This Journ. 1885, 19, 24. * “Rain and River Observations made in New South Wales, 1885,” by H. C. Russell, C.M.G. (Government Printer). OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 197 Mr. Russell wrote:—‘‘The amount of evaporation de- pends very much upon the state of the soil; if it is wet on the surface the evaporation goes on from it much faster than from water; but as the ground dries the condition is reversed and the earth evaporates less than the water . .The grass brings the subsoil water to the surface and aids evaporation in very dry weather, so that the evapora- tion from grassed soil is more regular than from bare soil, and in the course of the year it loses more than the dry earth by 20 per cent.; but in comparing it with water it evaporates 14 per cent. less.”’ The total evaporation for Sydney in 1885 is given as 36.514 inches, the monthly mean being 3.043. The lowest is given as 1.669 for July, and the highest as 4.683 inches for January. The mean monthly evaporation at Bourke was 5.174 inches for the months April to December (inclusive), 1885, the lowest being 1.963 for July, and the highest 9.308 inches for December, the average evaporation per day being given as 0.169. Atmospheric Effect on Flow from Springs at Kosciusko. On the 16th and 17th February, 1920, two small swamps were noticed to be feeding tiny rills which were finding their way along the gutter on the roadside a short dis- tance above the hotel, at an elevation of a little more than 5000 feet above sea-level. From sunrise until about 2.30 p.m. the sun shone full upon the road, but after this the springs and small streams came within the shadow of the mountain. The effect of diminishing evaporation was very clearly manifest on the flow of water as soon as it came within the shadow. In the case of No. 1 stream, which was the more feeble of the two, it was found to extend 66 yards along the roadside from its source at 2.45 p.m., while at 5.45 p.m. 198 R. H. CAMBAGE. its length was 76 yards, but during the night, and at 7.30’ a.m. the following morning it reached 92 yards from its source, and disappeared in the sand near a gully into which it doubtless found its way. During the whole of the following forenoon the length of the little rill was. gradually shortened by evaporation, until again it reached only about 66 yards from its source. No. 2 stream was fed from a little swamp about 50 feet by 20 feet, and extended 160 yards from its source at 2.30% p.m., while at 7.20 a.m. the following morning it reached 252 yards, or an additional 92 yards, and disappeared. under a culvert. The evaporation from the heat of the sun operated on it so that by 10.5 a.m. it had receded 56: yards, and 88 yards by 12.25 p.m. and the volume in the little stream itself was much reduced. Atmospheric Effect on Flow at Mittagong. Water is impounded under large masses of basalt on the: Mittagong Range, and finds its way out at various points. where it forms swampy areas and springs. In May, 1923, a farm on the side of the range was visited, and it was. found that the water for the stock was brought about 300: yards in a pipe one and a half inches in diameter from one of these springs which was open to the full rays of the sun. The farmer’s statement was that during the sum-. mer months there was usually a full flow throughout the night and in the morning, but this would decrease towards the afternoon of a moderately hot day and perhaps cease at about 5 p.m., while on a very hot day the flow would. cease altogether at about 2 p.m., though it would probably start again sometime during the evening. On one exceed-- ingly hot day the water ceased and did not flow again un-- til the following morning, when the weather was much cooler. This variation in flow clearly seems to be in res-- ponse to variation in evaporation. = Ita cealal OUTBREAK OF SPRINGS IN AUTUMN. 199 In June, 1923, it was found that the water from this spring had continued to run, day and night, since early in April, but as evidence that a spring without being re- plenished is not inexhaustible, the volume had become so reduced owing to continued dry weather that a one inch pipe was sufficient to carry off the water in June. An Outburst at Bathurst in Dry Weather. On the 25th February, 1923, a message was sent from Bathurst to the Sydney press as follows:—‘‘ What are re- garded as signs of a continuance of the drought is the fact that in several portions of the Bathurst district springs have broken out and are running strongly. Vale Creek, which has been dry since last storm has now two inches of water running, as the result of the springs.’’ As it was thought that this outbreak of springs was con- sequent upon a fall of temperature having occurred some little time earher, I recently obtained, through the kindness of Mr. KH. W. Timcke, acting Meteorologist in charge of the Sydney Weather Bureau, the Bathurst temperature figures for the period in question, and they disclose a fall of 16 degrees from the 15th to the 16th February, 1923. When it is remembered that some days would elapse from the time the spring began to flow until it reached and was noticed some distance down the ereek, it seems fair to as- sume that this particular outbreak was the result of a fall of temperature and a diminution of evaporation. How long this flow continued I am unable to say, but the re- turning heat probably soon terminated it. It may be noted that on the 16th February, when the maximum temperature fell from 89 to 73 degrees, and the minimum fell as low as 47 degrees, the wind was from the east, and would contain more humidity and less evapora- ting properties than a wind coming to the Bathurst district from the west or north. 200 R. H. CAMBAGE. The temperatures in question are given below. Bathurst Minimum Maximum February, 1928. Degrees. Degrees. Wind 9 a.m. 12 50 88 calm clear 13 56 83 east light clear 14 ays) 90 east light clear 15 59 89 calm cloudy 16 ayy) 73 east light overcast 17. AT 86 calm few clouds 18 54 94 calm cloudy 19 De 95 calm clear 20 56 90 calm clear 2il o4 98 east light clear 22 64 96 calm cloudy 23 Be 101 calm fine 24 64 102 ealm fine 20 67 98 calm fine On the 17th April, 1923, a message was sent to the press from Bathurst stating that ‘‘Springs have broken out at the head of the Fish River, and a strong stream of clear water is now running into the Macquarie’’. An examina- tion of the temperature figures at the Sydney Weather Bureau shows that the average maximum temperature at Bathurst from the first to the 17th April, 1923, was 72 degrees, but that on the 8th and 9th April the maximum was 64 and 65 degrees respectively. This fall in the tem- perature was probably responsible for the stream which a week later had reached the Macquarie. There seems nothing remarkable in the fact that springs may start to flow on or after about the middle of April even in a drought period, for the rate of evaporation has eonsiderably diminished by this time, and, even without any rain having fallen, it is not unusual to see a creek, which heads in a swamp, flowing more freely in May than in March. It does not appear that the outbreak of springs in dry weather has any bearing on the duration of a drought. NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 201 DESCRIPTION OF THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ONE ACACIA. By W. F. BLAKELY. Assistant Botanist, National Herbarium, Sydney. (With Plates XVII.-XX.) “(Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Oct. 3, 1928.) EUCALYPTUS JOYCEAE, N.Sp. Arbor ad 20-60 pedes alta, nonnumquam duabus aut pluribus -stirpibus a basi emergentibus; cortex asper, per pedes plures ‘persistens, levis et deciduus in superiori trunco et in ramis; folia juvenilia pluribus parvibus opposita, orbicularia, elliptica -vel late lanceolata, breviter petiolata, 4-5 x 2.5-4 cm.; folia adultiora alternata, petiolata, lanceolata vel obliquo-falcata, -eoriacea, frequentibus glandulis punctiformibus, 6-18 x 2-3 cm.; -vernatio subconspicna, venae laterales ex angulo 30-40° surgentes a costa media; inflorescentia umbellis axillaribus 7-15 florum; gemmae clavatae, acutae, pedicellatae; calyx calathi- formis circiter 3 mm. altus; operculum conicum vel fere rostratum; antherae reniformes; capsulae pyriformes vel fere pilulares, truncatae 5-7 x 6-8 mm.; ligum durum, fulvum vel ‘badium. A tree 20-60 feet high, sometimes Mallee-like, with two or more stems branching from the base, 1-2 feet in diameter. Barks persistent, light grey, coarsely flaky- fibrous for 6-12 feet, then smooth, deciduous, white or mottled on the remainder of the trunk and branches, and with the characteristic marking of EH. haemastoma or E. micrantha. Juvenile leaves rather thin, the first three or four alter- nate, sueceeded by three or more pairs in the opposite ‘Stage, obicular, elliptical to broadly lanceolate, very shortly petiolate, 4-5 em. long, 2.5-4 em. broad; venation somewhat 202 W. F. BLAKELY. fine, the numerous lateral veins much branched, especially in the orbicular leaves; intramarginal nerve distant from. the edge. Intermediate leaves broadly lanceolate to obliquely- lanceolate, acuminate, shortly petiolate, 7-13 em. long, 4-8: cm. broad; venation moderately distinct on both surfaces, the lateral veins 18 to 23 on each side of the prominent midrib, somewhat irregular and diverging at an angle of 40-50° with the midrib; intramarginal vein distant from the slightly thickened revolute margin. Adult leaves alternate, moderately thick, glossy, with numerous oil-dots, petiolate, lanceolate to obliquely-falcate- lanceolate, acuminate, 6-18 em. long, 2-3 em. broad; vena- tion somewhat distinct, the lateral veins rather fine, mak-. ing an angle of 30-40° to the midrib; intramarginal vein usually distant from the edge. Inflorescence in axillary umbels or sub-paniculate owing to the suppression of the upper leaves; peduncles slightly compressed, somewhat slender, up to 2 em. long. Buds. clavate, acute, 7-15 in the head, distinctly pedicellate, the pedicels at first shghtly angular, but as the fruit develops: becoming rather slender and terete, 5-7 mm. long. Calyx somewhat goblet-shaped, about 3 mm. deep, 4 mm. across. the top; operculum conical to almost rostrate, sometimes. longer than the calyx-tube. Filaments white, all antheri- ferous. Anthers small, reniform, usually with a terminal oland. Fruit pedicellate, pyriform to nearly pilular 5-7 x 6-8 mm. truncate, slightly contracted at the top. Dise usually forming a thin downward sloping reddish ring over the basal portion of the valves, but sometimes almost flush. with the edge of the ecalycine ring; valves usually 4,. invariably inclosed owing to the declivity of the capsular dise, which is most marked in some specimens. NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 203: Timber brown to reddish brown, darker than that of E. piperita and E. Considemana, moderately hard and interlocked, with the characteristic gum veins of the above species. On the whole, it is harder and probably more: durable than the timber of its congeners. For fuel pur- poses it is better than the timber of EF. piperita. Type from about one mile south of Kariong Trig Wondabyne, New South Wales (D. W. C. Shiress and Wit /B.). The tree in the field conveys the impression of being intermediate between E. haemastoma and E. piperita, as: it partakes of the cortical characters of both species, while the buds and fruits resemble those of the former, and the timber approaches more closely to that of the latter. E. Joyceae is unique in that it connects the Pepper- mints with two Renantherous White Gums with red timber, namely, H. haemastoma and E. micrantha, which. were tentatively placed in the Renantherae, apparently without any very close affinities, especially as regards the timber. But E. Joyceae appears to bridge the gap, not only in the colour of the timber, but also in other morpho- logical characters, which, when carefully studied in conjunction with those of its allies seem to define more clearly its natural genetical relationship with the above- mentioned groups. Named in memory of my adopted daughter Joyce, who,. before her untimely death, assisted me in many little ways with my botanical work. Range. It appears to be confined to the Hawkesbury sandstone, between Parramatta and Gosford, singly or in small clumps, but, so far, I have not succeeded in finding its. optimum. It is, however, more plentiful on the northern. "204 W. F. BLAKELY. ‘side of the Hawkesbury River than on the southern side, and I predict that when it is better known its range will probably extend as far as Brisbane, Queensland. The localities south of the Hawkesbury are—Parramatta, “**Half-barked variety of White Gum’’ (Rev. Dr. W. W. Woolls). The fruits are broad and truncate, with a well- defined disc. Near the Suspension Bridge, North Sydney (D. W. C. Shiress). Stony Creek Road, about half-way between Pymble and De Burgh’s Bridge (C. T. White cand W.F.B.). When Mr. White’s attention was drawn to the tree, he intimated that it resembled a tree growing around Brisbane. About one mile east of Wahroonga Railway Station, on the edge of the shale, where it grows into shaft-like trees, in association with EH. micrantha, E. Sieberiana, FE. corymbosa, and E. resinifera (W.F.B.) ; ‘near the old Wool-wash, Spring Gully Creek, 1 mile east of Hornsby, and about + mile north of Junction Road; also 4 mile west of the latter locality; between Collings Street and Junction Road (W.F.B.). On the track to ‘Gibberygong Creek, Kuring-gai Chase, near the descent ‘to the Bogey Hole (W.F.B.). Hill 60, about 1 mile north -of Cowan; also on the east side of Cowan Tunnel, and on the top of the Tunnel (D. W. C. Shiress and W.F.B.) ; near the 26-mile post Cowan, twin trees 30 feet high, one foot in diameter. Bark rough at base for 6-10 feet, then ‘smooth and blotched like the bark of E. haemastoma, for -which it could easily be mistaken were it not for the ‘rough, flaky bark at base, and the Peppermint-like odour of the leaves when crushed. The fruits are larger than ‘the type, and about the same size as those of the co-type. Localities North of the Hawkesbury.—Two trees found by D.W.C.S. and W.F.B. at the head of the long swamp, ‘two miles north of Wondabyne; and two more on the ‘rocks overlooking Mooney Mooney, about 4 mile north of NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 205- the first locality. There is also a large tree in an open gully, about 3 mile north of the second locality, and two: more trees, one on each side of the Wallaby Rocks, + mile: east of the latter locality. All are small trees except one, with a little rough bark at base, and with the upper por- tion of the stems and branches smooth and white. About one mile south of Kariong Trig., on a rather exposed plateau about 700 feet above sea level, are nine trees, ranging from 40-60 feet high, and from 12 to 24 inches. in diameter, all of which have rough bark at base and smooth bark on the branches. These may be regarded as. the Type (D.W.C.S. and W.F.B.). On the Woy Woy- Gosford Road, about one mile from the junction of the new Wiseman’s Ferry Road; also by the side of the new Sydney-Neweastle Road, about one mile below the junction. of the former road. A little below the junction of the old Wiseman’s Ferry Road and the old road leading to the Industrial Home for Boys, Penang Range, near Gosford, are six trees ranging from 25 to 60 feet in height, and from 9-24 inches. in diameter. They have the characteristic persistent rough bark at the base, smooth upper stems and branches as the Kariong trees. The largest, and probably the oldest, tree appears to be a very great age, and has indications of having weathered many storms and bush fires. In fact, nearly all the trees of H. Joyceae are severely charred and burnt to almost a shell at the base, and in some cases the original tree is burnt right out, and from the thin shell fresh shoots have sprung up and developed into: lofty trees. About 8 miles from Gosford, on the top of Penang Ranges. This specimen is recorded in error by J. H. Maiden in Proce. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., Vol. XXV., p. 109: (1900), as EH. stricta, and as EH. Consideniana, Maiden,. 206 - W. F, BLAKELY. le, Vol. XXIX., p. 477 (1904), and is figured in error under H. Considemana in the Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus, Part X., Plate 46, figs. 9a, 9b, and referred to on page 314 as follows—Penang , Mountain, Gosford (J.H.M. and J. L. Boorman), ‘“*Very like a Peppermint in appearance, only the bark is not so stringy —more flaky, white smooth limbs. A fair-sized tree and scarce (Andrew Murphy).’’ Co-type. At the bottom of page 315, Mr. Maiden, when discussing EH. Sieberrana and E. Consideniana, again refers to it, 1e., ‘‘The Penang fruits are not perfectly typical; they show more than ordinary resemblance to H. Sieberiana.’’ The fruits are not quite ripe, hence the very sharp rim which is due to the undeveloped state of the capsular dise. 3 Affinities. 1. With E. haemastoma Sm. Trees of EH. Joyceae could very easily be mistaken for E. haemastoma, as the cortical characters of the upper portion of the trunk and branches of both species are almost identical, except that the markings of EH. Joyceae are less blotchy and greener, and are usually in broad irregular stripes, which is mainly due to the fact that the smooth bark decorticates annually in broad ribbons 2-10 feet long. While the bark of E. haemastoma. sheds in small, broad flakes, rarely exceeding 12 inches long; it is also different in texture, being soft and brittle. The juvenile leaves of both species are broad, but those of EL. haemastoma are much broader and coarser than the leaves of EH. Joyceae; while there is also an almost total absence of aromatic oil in the leaves of the former, it is always markedly present in leaves of the latter. The adult leaves of both present the same general facies, but the leaves of EH. Joyceae are, on the whole, smaller and less coriaceous than those of HE. haemastoma, and, on NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 207 the other hand, they are furnished with more oil dots than the leaves of its ally. The buds of EL. Joyceae differ from those of HF. haemas- toma in being more acute or rostrate. As regards the fruits, they are somewhat similar in size and shape in both species, but the capsular dise of HE. Joyceae is invari- ably more oblique, while the pedicels are frequently longer and more slender than those of H. haemastoma. The timber of EH. Joyceae is brown to reddish-brown, hard, and close grained; that of H. haemastoma is red, moderately soft and brittle. 2. With E. piperita Sm. Some trees of EH. Joyceae, especially those with the rough, persistent. bark extending almost to the large branches would pass for this species. But an examination of the buds, fruits, juvenile leaves, and a closer scrutiny of the cortical characters of the latter will readily show that, although at first sight they appear to be alike, there is a marked difference between them when they are care- fully investigated. For instance, the persistent bark of H. Joyceae is more coarsely fibrous and of a yellowish-grey colour, while the smooth deciduous bark is whiter and sheds in longer and broader strips. The juvenile leaves are at least a size larger, more broadly lanceolate, and thicker than those of L. pyperrta. The buds of #. Joyceae are relatively larger, and the fruits also differ in shape, size and texture from those of its ally. 3. With H. Bottw Blakely. The large fruits of this species somewhat resemble those of #. Joyceae; and there is also a general similarity in the juvenile and intermediate leaves. On the other hand, 208 W. F. BLAKELY. E. Bottu grows to a much larger tree, and its persistent rough bark usually extends well out on the branches. 4. With E. Consideniana Maiden. E. Joyceae is not unlike E. Considenana as regards size and habit, but the persistent, rough bark of the former does not extend to the tips of the branches like that of the latter. The timber of H. Joyceae is darker and harder, while the buds are more acute, and the fruit is thinner and slightly different in shape. The juvenile leaves also differ from those of EL. Considemana in being less glaucous. Description of Seedlings. Hypocotyl slender, terete, purple-brown. Cotyledons reniform, somewhat unequally lobed, tapering into a long petiole, 7 x 5 mm., dark green above, purple-brown beneath. Ist pair of leaves opposite, petiolate, oblong-lanceolate, 2 em. long, 9 mm. broad, dark green above, purple-brown beneath; veins obscure. 2nd pair of leaves opposite, shortly petiolate, oblong, or nearly so, 4.5 x 2 em., light green above, pale beneath. 8rd pair of leaves opposite, curved inward with shorter petioles than in the preceding pair, oblong-lanceolate, 7.5 x 2.3 em.; venation obscure above, prominent beneath. 4th pair of leaves similar to the 3rd pair, but much longer with a broader base, 9.7 x 3.5 em.; upper surface dark green, veins obscure; lower surface pale green; lateral veins conspicuous, diverging at an angle of 35-40° to the midrib; oil dots copious. Ist pair of alternate leaves lanceolate, petiolate, 12 x 3.8 em.; venation and colour the same as the 4th pair. 2nd pair of alternate leaves lanceolate, petiolate, 13 x 4.3 em.; upper surface dark green, veins distinct, midrib, lateral veins and margins a warm reddish-brown; lower NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 209 surface light green; veins prominent, green, diverging at an angle of 30-40° to the midrib; intramarginal vein 3-4 mm. from the margin. Internodes terete, except at their junction with the leaves, purple-brown, ranging from 3-5 em. long. At 4 inches high E. Joyceae is almost identical with E. anomala, but after that, the leaves of the last-men- tioned species become more sharply lanceolate and sessile, and they also continue in the opposite stage for a greater number of pairs than H. Joyceae, which does not appear to exceed four or five pairs at most. The seedlings of HE. Joyceae have fewer opposite leaves than those of E. piperita; they are, however, larger, and broader, also less glaucous and more lanceolate than those of the latter species. EUCALYPTUS ANOMALA n.sp. Arbor 25-35 pedes alta; cortex pallide cinereus, rude diffissus et fibrosus, persistens inferiore trunco, at supra laevis candi- dusque; folia juvenilia opposita saltem decem paribus, late lanceolata, sessilia vel amplexicaulia; folia adultiora, petiolata, lanceolata vel obliquo-lanceolata, acuminata, crassa, coriacea, 5-19 x 2-3 cm.; venatio aliquantulum inconspicua, venae laterales tennissimae, divergentes angulo 35-40° a costa media; umbellae axillares vel pseudo-paniculatae; gemmae 10-20 in umbella, pedicellatae, clavatae, fere omnino obtusae; tubus calycis sub- calathiformis, 4-5 mm. diametro; operculum scutellariforme, apiculatum; antherae omnes fertiles, parvae, reniformes; capsulae subpyriformes, pedicellatae 7-8 v 6-8 mm.; lignum pallidum, fissile. Trees 25-30 feet high, 9-12 inches in diameter, with a rough coarsely fibrous light-grey bark on the lower por- tion of the trunk, the upper portion smooth and white, which decorticates annually in long narrow ribbons. Juvenile leaves opposite for six or more pairs, cordate- lanceolate to lanceolate, sessile to somewhat amplexical, eto x 3-7 em; N—October 3, 1928. 210 W. F. BLAKELY. Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, lanceolate to obliquely- lanceolate, acuminate, thick, coriaceous, 5-19 x 2-3 em. Venation somewhat obscure; lateral veins very fine, di- verging at an angle of 35-40° to the midrib; intramarginal vein usually distant from the margin. Inflorescence 1n axillary umbels or forming moderately large pseudo-panicles owing to the suppression of the upper leaves, as is often seen in EF. haemastoma and E. umbra. Peduneles compressed, dilated and thickened at the top, 10-20 mm. long. Buds 10-20 in the umbel, pedi- cellate, clavate, almost obtuse; pedicels slightly angular, up to 7 mm. long. Calyx somewhat goblet-shaped, about 3 mm. deep, 4-5 mm. broad. Operculum shorter than the ealyx-tube, apiculate, scutelliform, with a minute internal appendage suspended from the top. Filaments numerous, white, except at the extreme base, which are a pale purple, all antheriferous. Anthers small, reniform, the broad papery cells usually tipped with a minute globular gland. Fruit pedicellate, shortly pyriform, 7-8 x 6-8 mm., truncate or more or less slightly domed; dise reddish, moderately broad, forming a shghtly thickened ring around the base of the valves, and extending almost over the tips in a very thin layer; valves usually four, en- closed; pedicels conspicuous, slightly compressed and wrinkled, 5-9 mm. long. Timber pale, close-grained, fairly hight, slightly darker than that of H. umbra when fresh but apparently of the same texture. It is an interesting species from a taxonomic standpoint, as it appears to form a natural connecting link between the Stringybarks, and the Gums belonging to the Renan- therae section. NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 211 The field and botanical characters of H. anomala so elosely resemble those of H. Joyceae that Mr. Shiress and myself for some time failed to distinguish the difference between them, except that the venation of the leaves of E. anomala was somewhat finer, and the leaves possessed a slightly different perfume to those of E. Joyceae. Seeds of both species were sown to ascertain whether there wou'd be any marked difference between the young plants. When the seedlings had reached a height of five inches, the leaves of those of E. anomala were found to be totally different from those of EF. Joyceae, both as regards size and shape, and in being opposite for a greater number of pairs. They also showed a marked affinity with those of FE. umbra and E. acmenioides, two members of the Stringy- bark series, while the seedlings of FE. Joyceae displayed a striking resemblance to EL. pipertta on the one hand, and HE. haemastoma on the other, and may be described as being intermediate in character between the two species. Renge. So far it is known from Bywater, near Brooklyn, Hawkesbury River, where it grows in association with EL. umbra, E. haemastoma and E. punctata; on the southern side of Sugarloaf, about five miles north of Brooklyn; also about one mile due east of Cowan Railway Station, New South Wales (D.W.C. Shiress and W.F.B.). Affinities. A close examination of the botanical characters and its appearance in the field seem to suggest that it is a natural hybrid between FE. haemastoma and E. umbra, and it may be described as a rough-barked haemastoma, or a partly smooth-barked wmbra. The persistent rough-bark is very different both in general appearance and in texture from that of EZ. wnbra. While the smooth bark, although deciduous at one period 212 W. F. BLAKELY. of the year, is unlike the bark of EF. haemastoma in that it exuviates in long, narrow ribbons, and not in short, broad pieces like the last named species. The venation of the leaves is intermediate between that of H. haemastoma and E. umbra; while the buds and the fruits resemble those of the former species. The juvenile leaves, how-. ever, are of the HE. wmbra type, and, therefore, sharply separate it from EL. haemastoma, placing it without doubt in the Stringybark series, notwithstanding the difference: in the texture of the bark, and other morphological. distinctions. Description of Seedlings. Hypocotyl slender, terete, purple-brown. Cotyledons oblong-reniform, almost uniform without any depression in the centre as 1s the case with many cotyledons. belonging to the Reniformae Section, 8 x 5 mm., trinerved, dark green above, purple-brown beneath. 1st pair of leaves opposite, petiolate, narrow-lanceolate: to acute, 2.5 x 1 em., dark green and obscurely veined above, purple-brown beneath. 2nd to 6th pair of leaves. opposite, lanceolate to cordate-lanceolate, sessile to amplex- ical, 9-14 x 3-6 em., dark green above, pale green beneath; veins moderately fine, the intramarginal vein slightly remote from the edge. Internodes elongated, terete, except the broadly dilated portion close to the leaves, reddish to a deep purple-brown. In all stages up to 4 inches they are almost inseparable from those of EH. Joyceae; after that they resemble the seedlings of HE. wmbra and E. acmeniordes. EucALypTus WaARDII, n.sp. Arbor erecta, Stringybark, 60-70 pedes alta, 1-2 pedes dia- metro; cortex crassus, fibrosus, ad parvos ramos persistens; folia juvenilia 2-3 paribus opposita, angusto-lanceolata, breviter petiolata, 3-12 x 1-2 cm., pallide viridia, glabra, nitentia; folia. NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 213 - adultiora alternata, petiolata, lanceolata vel falcato-lanceolata, acuminata, 8-20 x 2-4 cm., obscuro-viridia; venae laterales a costa mediana angulo 45° diver gentes; inflorescentia umbellis exillaribus 7-14 mediocrium alborum florum; gemmae pedicel- latae, fasciculis stellatim radiantibus, pedunculo subtereti 10-14 mm. longo; calyx cyathiformis, 4 x 3 mm.; operculum plerumque rostratum, 4-5 mm. longum; anterae reniformes; capsulae ovales vel pyriformes, pedicellatae, 8 x 8 — 9 x 10 mm. solidae, parvum aditum praebentes; discus bene finitus, ex parte supra valvas capsulae profunde inclusas extendens. An erect Stringybark, 60-70 feet high, 1-2 feet in diameter; bark thick, furrowed, fibrous, persistent to the small branches, branchlets sub-terete. Juvenile leaves (not seen from the base of the tree but from the fruiting branches only) opposite for the first two pairs, narrow-lanceolate, faleate-lanceolate to acumi- nate, shortly petiolate, 3-12 x 1-2 em., light green, smooth and shining without the slightest trace of stellate hairs. Intermediate leaves (not seen from young saplings, but from branch suckers only) alternate, narrow lanceolate or obtuse-lanceolate, shortly petiolate, shghtly oblique, 9-10 x 3-4.5 em., ight green with a somewhat obscure venation. Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, lanceolate to falcate- lanceolate, acuminate, slightly oblique, 8-20 x 2-4 em., dark green and glossy on both surfaces, moderately thick. Venation somewhat obscure, the very fine lateral veins diverging at an angle of 40-50° to the midrib; intra- marginal nerve distant from the margin. Oil dots small, Copious. Inflorescence in axillary umbels of 7-14 white flowers. Buds pedicellate, subfusiform, hight green, radiating in stellate-like clusters on sub-terete peduncles 10-14 mm. long. Calyx wine-glass shaped, 4 x 3 mm. Operculum acuminate to rostrate 4-5 mm. long. Filaments white, flexuose, nearly all fertile; anthers reniform, usually erowned with a large globular gland. 214 W. F. BLAKELY. Fruit oval to pyriform, distinctly pedicellate, 8 x 8 -— 9 x 10 mm. thick, contracted at the top into a small orifice ; dise forming a well-defined ring inside the calycine border, and which extends partly over the small, somewhat deeply enclosed valves of the capsule. Timber pale, very fissile. Range. Confined to the Port Jackson district so far as we know at present. Gladesville (J. L. Boorman); Lane Cove River near Killara (J. H. Maiden, Dec. 1898). The late Mr. Maiden suggested that it might be a natural hybrid between EL. pilularis and E. eugenioides. Near the old Wooi-wash,. Spring Gully Creek, Hornsby (Ray Fogarty, E. Stanton and W.F.B., June 1928). The type. On the Galston Road 14 miles from Hornsby (D. W. C. Shiress and W.F.B., July 1916). One mile 8.W. of Parramatta (R. H. Cambage,. Mareh, 1901, 5:). Named in honour of my esteemed friend and colleague, Mr. E. N. Ward, Curator, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Affinities. 1. With E.entgra R. T. Baker. Both species are some- what alike in carpological characters, but the fruits of E. mgra are much thinner than those of HE. Wardu; the buds of the former are also smaller and less rostrate, while the juvenile leaves are narrower; and there is a marked difference in the perfume of both species. 2. With E. eugeniordes Sieber. It is readily distinguished from this species by the large subpyriform fruits, and in the more rostrate buds. | 3. With L. Muelleriana Howitt. The fruits of HE. Wardit resemble those of its ally both as regards shape and sculpture, but on the whole they are smaller, while the buds are totally different, being rostrate and not clavate like the buds of HE. Muelleriana. NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 215 UNINERVES (RACEMOSAE). Acacta LUCASII, n.sp. Frutex humilis ramis cinero-tomentosis, germinibus juvenili- bus dense cinereo-ferrugineis; phyllodia uninervia, ovata vel elliptico-lanceolata, undulata, breviter petiolata, subrigida, hirsuta, scabra, marginibus nervum flavescentem simulantibus, 2.5-38 cm. longa, 9-18 mm. lata; inflorescentia praebens capita pedunculata vel racemos supra phyllodia prominentes; capita dense villosa 12-20 flores comprehendunt; calyx parvus, sinuose lobatus, hirsutus, duplo brevior corollae attenuatae; petala 5 ex parte conjuncta, angusto-lanceolata, hirsuta, solida, incurva; legumina breviter stipitata, dense ferrugineo-tomentosa, ob- longa, obtusa, 2-4 cm. longa, 1 cm. lata; semina breviter ob- ligua; funiculus filiformis, in arillum candidum navicularem desineris. A small shrub, branches hoary-tomentose, the young shoots and pods densely hoary-ferrugineous, phyllodia uninerved, ovate to elliptical-lanceolate, undulate, shortly petiolate, somewhat rigid and more or less hirsute and scabrous, the yellowish nerve-like margins conspicuous, and furnished with a small basal gland, 2.5-8 em. long, 9-18 mm. broad. Stipules small, black-pointed, semi-rigid, moderately persistent and partly hirsute. Inflorescence in pedunculate heads or more frequently in flexuose, pubescent racemes exceeding the phyllodia. (Perfect flower-heads not seen.) Heads globular, densely villose, of 12-20 moderately large flowers. Calyx small, sinuately lobed, hirsute, scarcely half the length of the attenuated corolla. Petals 5, united near the centre, hirsute, narrow-lanceolate, thick, incurved. Ovary densely tomentose. Bracts spathulate to diamond-shaped, concave at the back, with glandular, hirsute hairs con- cealing the calyx. Pods shortly stipitate, densely ferrugineous-villose, oblong, obtuse, with thickened nerve-like margins, 2-4 em. x 1 em. or larger. Seeds slightly oblique, jet black, ovate. 216 W. F. BLAKELY. Funicle filiform for about half its length, finally terminat- ing in a white, navicular arillus nearly the length of the seed. Named in honour of my friend and colleague, Mr. A. H. 8S. Lucas. Range. Bumbury Creek and Green Hill, 8 miles towards Wadbiliga, Tuross River district, New South Wales (Miss M. A. Harnett, 16th January, 1928). Near A. podalyriaefolia in the phyllodia, but totally distinct from it in the 5-merous flowers, densely ferru- - gineous-tomentose or villose young shoots and pods. The pods are remarkable for their rich vestiture, which is a striking contrast against the light green phyllodia with their yellowish margins, and thereby A. Lucasw is readily distinguished from all the Eastern species. Acacia KYBEANENSIS Maiden and Blakely ; this Journal 1927, 60, 188. Pods not previously deseribed. Pods oblong, moderately straight, distinctly stipitate, apiculate, glabrous, slightly glaucous, the valves thin, scarcely coriaceous, 3.5-5.5 em. long, 1.5 em. broad. Seeds oblique or nearly so, ovate, jet black; funicle white, filiform for about half its length, then thickened into a carnose navicular aril nearly the length of the seed. The broad pods connect it with A. podalyriaefolia. Tuross River (Miss M. A. Harnett, December, 1927). I wish to express my thanks to Dr. G. P. Darnell-Smith, Director, Botanic Gardens, Sydney, for his advice and interest in this paper. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LX1/., 1928. Plate XVIT, Re “ : 4 : ‘ 3 frm nen E’. Joycee Blakely, Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928 Plate XVIII. j i j 4 j i ; : | | EF. anomala Blakely, Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LX11., 1928. Plate XIX. H. Wardii Blakely, os Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928 Plate XX. HE j F : i j ; a } j 4 : : es: Acacia Lucasii Blakely, NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS AND ACACIA. 217 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Pian XevVE, Eucalyptus Joyceae Blakely. 1. A large juvenile leaf. bo . Buds and fruits, all from one mile 8. of Kariong Trig. The type. 3. Fruiting branch, 8 miles from Gosford on the top of Penang Ranges (Andrew Murphy). Co-type. Puate XVIII. Eucalyptus anomala Blakely. 1. Young buds; la, fully developed buds and flowers. 2. Fruiting branch. 3. Juvenile leaf. All from Bywater. lean uwoyp.S B:G Eucalyptus Wardu Blakely. 1. Portion of a fruiting branch producing a sucker with | two pairs of opposite leaves. 2. Buds. d. Fruits. All from the same tree, Spring Gully Creek, Hornsby. | PATH eX Xe Acacia Lucasu Blakely. Portion of a branch showing phyllodia and pods. 218 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. “THE CHEMISTRY OF THE EXUDATION FROM THE WOOD OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI.” By A. R. PENFOLD, F.A.C.L, F.C.S. Curator and Economic Chemist, and F’. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.C.S. Assistant Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney. (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.) Mr. C. E. Lane-Poole, Inspector-General of Forests, Aus- tralian Forestry School, Canberra, in a communication dated 28th November, 1927, enquired if the Sydney Technological Museum would undertake the examination, with special reference to its economic utilisation, of a cer- tain oil which exudes from a tree occurring in New Guinea, and identified as close to Pentaspodon Motleyi. In com- plianee with this request, the examination was readily undertaken, and a quantity of the oil, which previously was obtainable in very limited quantity and difficult to procure, was made available. As a matter of fact, Mr. Lane-Poole reports that the quantity supplied, about 2 pints, took him four years to obtain. The botanical description and general characters of the tree yielding this remarkable exudation are given in Mr. Lane-Poole’s Report, ‘‘The Forest Resources of the Terri- tories of Papua and New Guinea,’’ 1925, page 109. (This: publication is printed and published for sale by the Com- monwealth Government of Australia). The following interesting and necessary particulars which furnish an account of the physical characters and source of the exudation are extracted therefrom, viz. :— CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 219 “The wood of this large tree, 8 feet girth, bole 80 feet, 120 feet over all, contains an oil in such abundance that it may be collected in conveniently placed receptacles, much as resin is collected from the Maritime Pine, only the cut must reach the heart. In many cases the flow is very heavy, and in one instance a gallon of oil was collected in three hours. In such cases it is probable that reservoirs of oil have been formed in hollows caused by rot, and the axe has tapped a crack that has piped off the supply. While a microscope may yield some explanation of the formation of the oil in the wood, a lens shows no special canals or vessels as one would expect to see. The oil is heavy and misty brown in colour; it re- sembles motor lubrication oil as used for cylinders. It has a smell which is hard to describe, though somewhat familiar—- somewhat fishy linseed oil is the nearest I can get to it.” We can confirm the physical characters so aptly described by Mr. Lane-Poole. To all intents and purposes, the oil, on account of its dark brown colour, viscosity, odour, etc., might easily be mistaken for a commercial boiled linseed oil. Referring again to the origin of the exudation, Mr. Lane- Poole, in a private communication, states :— “Microscopic examination shows that the medullary rays have canals, and these, even from dried specimens of the: wood, still store their quantity of oil. This is clearly visible with the liberkuhn method of illumination. I am sending yow a sample of the wood, so that you may examine it, also you. will see that the oil exudations are visible to the naked eye.” Mr. M. B. Welch, B.Sc., A.I.C., Economie Botanist at the- Sydney Technological Museum, who examined the small sample of wood referred to above, furnished the following: report thereon, viz. :— “The wood has been examined microscopically, and Sudan III. and alkannin both show the presence of oily bodies in the cavities of the sparsely distributed medullary secretary passages, in the cells of the thick walled protective sheath surrounding the canal, and to a slight extent in some of the wood parenchyma adjoining the canal, but nowhere else. The canals observed varied from 18-55 yy in diameter. The con-- contents were practically all soluble in 95% alcohol.” The very small original sample of exudation secured by Mr. Lane-Poole was submitted to Mr. T. G. H. Jones, University of Queensland, Brisbane, and his report is pub-. 220 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. ished in the ‘‘ Forest Resources of Papua and New Guinea,”’ 1925, pages 168-169. Unfortunately, the quantity avail- able did not enable this chemist to make more than a pre- liminary examination, and beyond the statement that it consisted of unsaturated acids possessing a molecular weight of about 400, no other data has been published. The present investigation of the larger samples submitted has shown the exudation to consist approximately of about ‘90-95°% of acid bodies possessing unusual characters. The ‘erude oil is non-volatile in steam, and we were unable to effect its distillation under reduced pressure (1 mm.) with- out decomposition. Consequently, it is very difficult to pro- duce evidence as to whether the principal component is a ‘chemical entity or a mixture. For the purpose of this ° -announcement it is regarded as a single acid. Evidence is adduced under ‘‘ Experimental’’ which shows the principal acid to be mono-carboxylic with two hydroxyl groups, and to possess the molecular formula C,,H,,0,. It gives a beautiful violet colouration with ferric chloride in alcoholic ‘solution. Unfortunately, no crystalline or solid derivatives (except the silver salt) could be prepared. The original objective of the investigation was to ascet- tain if the oil possessed any economic value. Consisting essentially of an acid or acids of high molecular weight, it yielded soaps with alkalies, which technically possessed ‘special merits on account of their valuable emulsifying pro- perties. At present, no other commercial use can be sug- gested. Its economic utilisation depends entirely on the possibility of supplhes being obtained in commercial quan- ‘tities. At present the prospects of its availability in large quantities at a cost which would enable it to compete with rosin or similar products is not promising, judging from Mr. Lane-Poole’s report. However, very little is known of the extent of the natural products of New Guinea in its pre- -sent undeveloped condition. | CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 221 Experimental. The two samples of oily exudation received gave the fol- lowing chemical and physical constants on examination:: Sample No. 1. Sample No. 2. Specific Gravity, res 1.011 1.01 Refractive Index, 20°C .. 1.5280 1.5295 mei Number ..,... ... 139.08 138.24 Saponification Number .. 142.09 146.64 Solubility in 70°% Alcohol @oyaawmeieht) 2. ..' .. 2.6 vols. 2.5 vols. Acid Number after acety- leeomye ae Pe s LO207 102.53 Iodine Number (Wijs) ... —— 192 Chloride in ethyl aleohol jprecipitate forming on Reaction with Ferric (Deep violet colour with solution .. standing. It was found early in the investigation that the crude oil was soluble in 8% aqueous sodium hydroxide solution, and, therefore, in order to determine if the constituents were of a variable nature it was treated with 1% aqueous. solution ammonium carbonate, 5°94 aqueous sodium ear- bonate, and 8% aqueous sodium hydroxide solutions respec- tively. The best procedure was to dissolve the erude oil in approximately four times its volume of ether, and to treat repeatedly with the reagents mentioned. Ammonium Carbonate Extract—On acidification with dilute sulphuric acid, extraction with ether and removal of solvent, only 0.8% of a dark brown viscous residue was obtained. It gave a faint violet colouration with ferric chloride in alcoholic solution much resembling the crude oil and main component, and was found to possess an acid number of 114.2. Sodium Carbonate Extract —Shaking at room tempera- ture with this reagent failed to remove more than a trace of acid bodies. 222 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. Sodium Hydroxide EHxtract—On treatment with this reagent the greater part of the oil went into solution. On acidification with dilute sulphuric acid, extraction with ether, and removal of solvent, 93°94 of a dark reddish brown viscous oil, much resembling the crude exudation, was recovered. | Neutral Residue.—The main ethereal solution on removal of solvent yielded 5% of a yellow viscous oil with an acid number of 11 and refractive index of 1.5330. It did not give a colour reaction with ferric chloride in alcoholic solution. Examination of Principal Acid Constituent. Soluble in 8% sodium hydroxide solution. This component, which constituted over 90% of the crude ‘exudation, was found to possess the following chemical and physical characters, viz. :— Specific Gravity, LO aaa: Veet 1.0132 Refractive Index. 20" 4G) i" hss 1.5270 Solubility in 70% alcohol (by weight) 3.3 vols. Acid Number). 0) a Se Do. after acetylation |... > .ovWdi@een Saponitication No. 2.2. 08) Fe Te Do. after acetylation .. .. 203.24 Iodine Number (Wijs) 30° .. 32° 28 Molecular weight for monobasic acid ealeulated from Acid Number .. .. 3885. Colour Reaction.—A very striking violet colour reaction ‘was obtained when a drop of ferric chloride solution was added to a dilute alcoholic solution of this acid. A similar ‘eoloured precipitate separated on standing. Molecular Formula.—the following results were obtained on combustion, viz. :— (1) 0.1068 gram gave 0.2902 gram CO, & 0.0919 gram H,O C= 7417... B= oo2 CHEMISTRY OF PENTASPODON MOTLEYI. 233 (2) 0.1040 gram gave 0.2824 gram CO, & 0.0884 gram H,O C0 Ee a (3) 0.1154 gram gave 0.51386 gram CO, & 0.0970 gram H,O C= (267. = oa. C,,H,,0, requires C = 74.28%. H = 9.23%. Molecular Weight Deternination—A molecular weight determination by the Landsberger boiling point method, using acetone as solvent, gave the following result, viz. :— 1.5416 grams in 21 ¢.c. acetone elevated the boiling point 0.42° (average of 8 readings). M.Wt. = 384 C,,H,,0, required M.Wt. = 388 Silver Salt—The silver salt was prepared by neutralisa- tion of the acid body with dilute ammonia solution and pre- cipitation with silver nitrate solution. 0.7658 gram silver salt gave on ignition 0.1650 gram silver = 21.55% silver. The silver salt of C,,H,,0, requires 21.82°% silver. Copper Salt——On trituration of the acid with excess of copper carbonate no action appeared to take place at room temperature, but upon heating at water bath temperature a vigorous reaction resulted. The green copper salt was extracted by means of acetone, and was found upon removal of the solvent to be a very viscous and sticky green paste which would not solidify. 0.5722 gram of copper salt gave 0.0544 gram CuO on inition — 9 517 Cud. The copper salt of a monobasic acid of molecular formula, C,,H,,0, would yield by calculation 9.44% CuO. Presence of ‘‘CO”’ and “‘OH”’ Groups. The presence of ‘‘carbonyl’’ groups could not be detected by the use of hydroxylamine or semi-carbazone salts. The solubility, colour reaction, and general chemical deport- ment, so far observed, point to the presence of one 224 A. R. PENFOLD AND F. R. MORRISON. ‘“carboxyl’’ group and two ‘‘hydroxyl’’ groups in the mole- cule of this acid. The presence of the latter was demon- strated by the reactions with phenylisocyanate and particu- larly with napthylisocyanate, but no definite crystalline derivatives could be isolated from the reaction mixtures. Action of Bromine.—Treatment with bromine at —20° in both dry ether and carbon disulphide solutions respec- tively yielded sticky masses which could not be induced to erystallise. jiu THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 225 THE ESSENTIAL OIL FROM A BORONIA IN THE PINNATA SECTION. FROM FRAZER ISLAND, QUEENSLAND. (Together with a resumé of the essential oils from other closely allied pinnate leaf Boronias.) By A. RK, PENPOLD, H/ACCN., FIC.S: Curator and Economic Chemist, Technological Museum, Sydney. (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.) Shortly after the publication of a joint paper with Mr. M. B. Welch, B.Sc., A.I.C., Economie Botanist, Techno- logical Museum, Sydney, on the Botany and Chemistry of Boronia pinnata (Smith) and Boronia thujona (sp. nov.) (This Journal, Vol. LV. (1921), pages 196-209), material from a pinnate leaf Boronia from Frazer Island, Queens- land, was kindly furnished by Mr. C. T. White, F.L.S., Government Botanist of that State. It has been known up to the present as the ‘‘Thin-leafed’’ Boronia pinnata from Frazer Island. The examination of the essential oil from but a pound weight of the leaves and terminal branchlets revealed a striking difference between it and the oils from closely allied Species. Supplies of the leaves and terminal branchlets in quantity were accordingly procured through the good offices of the Queensland Forest Service for the express purpose of examining the essential oil. The leaves, on crushing between the fingers, emitted the powerful and eharacteristic odour of safrol. Mr. C. T. White, F.L:S., Government Botanist of Queensland, and Mr. E. Cheel, Curator of the National Herbarium, Sydney, have given much attention to the study of this thin-leafed form of O—December 5, 1928. 226 A. R. PENFOLD. Boronia pinnata, and both are of the opinion that it is pro- bably a form of either Boronia thujona (Penfold and Welch) or of Borona Muellert (Cheel). It is necessary at this stage briefly to review the scattered data on the characters and chemistry of these closely allied species of Boronia in order that the points of difference between those already described and this new form may be clearly demonstrated. In the first instance, a paper entitled ‘‘On the Essential Oil of Boroma prnnata, Sm., and the presence of Hlemicin,’’ by H. G. Smith, F.C.S., was published in the ‘‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria,’’ Vol. XXXII. (new series), part 1, 1919, pages 14-19. The species of Boronia referred to therein as B. pinnata, Sm., was later shown by Mr. E. Cheel to be identical with B. pinnata var. Muelleri, Bentham. This worker considered it to be worthy of specific rank and accordingly named it Boronia Muelleri, sp. nov. (See this Journal, Vol. LVIII. (1924), page 147). Leaves and terminal branchlets were kindly furnished in 1925 by Miss C. C. Currie, of Lardner, Victoria, through the Forestry Commission of Victoria, and the results obtained in the examination of the essential oil confirmed those obtained by the late H. G. Smith in the paper referred to above. (See under ‘‘ Experimental.’’) Although Mr. HE. Cheel finds difficulty in separating this species, B. Muelleri, from B. thujona by any well-defined botanical characters (see paper, ‘‘Notes on Boronia in the pinnate section, with a description of a new species,’’ by E. Cheel, this Journal, Vol. LVIII. (1924), page 148), the writer, who has handled the material in bulk for oil distilla- tion, has been able to discern a marked difference in general appearance, both in disposition of foliage and flowers. As a matter of fact, it is the most abundant flowering pinnate leaf Boronia I have as yet observed, the long terminals being especially heavily laden with blossom. THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 227 Referring now to the thin-leafed Boronia from Frazer Island, the Queensland Forest Service, in a letter under date 25th August, 1927, furnished the following particulars regarding its habitat which were supplied by the officer responsible for the collection of the material forwarded for oil distillation purposes. “On Fraser Island Boronia pinnata occurs in moist gullies and on the edges of fresh water swamps and creeks, where plenty of moisture is obtainable, but where the sun has play upon its foliage. The soil is composed of sand and rotting humus. It there grows in association with Leptospermum Liversidgei, Banksia latifolia and grasses and shrubs found in this type of country. The associated trees are Broadleafed Tea tree (Melaleuca leucadendron) and Swamp Mahogany (Eucalyptus robusta). The Boronia varies in height from two to six feet with a maximum stem diameter of one inch at ground level.” The habitat of Boronia thujona is very similar, but it has been observed to attain a greater height, sometimes up to 12 feet from the ground, with a stem diameter of 2ins. at ground level. The writer suggests that the Frazer Island Boronia be considered as a form of: B. thujona until such time as botanical science is able to bring forward morpho- logical or other evidence that will differentiate it from the closely allied species or forms. Although the essential oil is particularly high in content of safrol it is a species quite distinct from Boronia safrolifera, which is easily determinable by botanists (see this Journal, Vol. LVIII, 1924, page 146 and pages 230- ‘233, papers by Cheel and Penfold, respectively). The essential oils of the various species in the pinnate section show a remarkable diversity in chemical composi- tion, particulars of which are given in the summary at the end of this paper. 1228 A. R. PENFOLD. The Essential Oils. Pinnate Leaf Boroma from Frazer Island, Q. (B. thujona, var. ‘*A.’’) Two hundred and twenty-two and a half pounds weight of leaves and terminal branchlets were kindly furnished through the courtesy of the Queensland Forest Service. On distillation with steam, yellow oils, heavier than water, highly refracting and fluorescent, and smelling strongly of safrol, were obtained in a yield of 0.5 to 0.6% (second con- signment ignored on account of loss of oil during drying and transit). The chemical and physical characters are shown in table I. The principal constituents, so far identified, were found to be safrol (75-80% ) and [-limonene, with small quantities of phenolic bodies, sesquiterpene, and a paraffin of M.Pt. 65-66°. Experimental. The two principal distillates gave the following results on distillation, viz. :— 17/9/1923. 80 ¢.c., after removal of 0.61 gram phenolic constituents, commenced to distil at 70° (20 mm.), 20% distilled below 107° (10 mm.), and 75° distilled between 108°-112° (10 mm.). 24/7/1925. 100 ec. crude oil after removal of 0.1 gram phenolic constituent yielded 11% between 70° (20 mm.) and 107° (0 "mmo yes. between 70°-106° (10 mm.), 80% between 106°=11.2> 9110 mame), Determination of Linonene.—The lower boiling fractions of the above distillates were subjected to repeated fractional distillation over metallic sodium with the following results :— 229 THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. "29° =: YYS1IOM SI UO [IO Jo prark £ paqoayqoo ueyM ‘sq1Og Poyste M ‘Louphg 04 yoyedsap a0jz Buryoud 04 Jold epeys Ul petip are Ay[nJorwo soavory | T'2z | £°9 "S[OA 6 ‘praré Moy AyTTemI0uQe soueY “QIsuRI4 ur pus sutsap Sutanp Aqeqoad ysoy TIO ‘pesodmooep Ay[ey4aed pue Aap Lava soavey | 9°82 | F°6 *STOA 9 (uyereg Joey) -siedes qyta eae 8-OT | ‘S]oA $¢ ; ‘des you |(*94810m Aq ) *SyIVUIOI qiaqye es Dea gaqsq | 798M | A9itanios ‘puvjsuoonty ‘puvys] aozwrq woay .V., ‘AVA ‘VNOCOHL VINOYOI—I ATAVA 09ZE"1 | o9°8— | E9C0°T PSTIG'T | oTT- 68T0°T GSZS°T | o@° IT - | S9CGO'T da a ed 002” of tP %69'0 %10°O %ES'0 "SqIOL | SZ61/L/FZ ‘sqteze | ¢z61/T/cI ‘SqIoL | e26t/6/L1 ‘1lO JO Petz *sOAvO'T yo a6 FU SIOM 230 A. R. PENFOLD. (17/9/23 Lot. Boiling Point, 66° - 72° (10mm) ; d42°, 0.852 = ae = esto 5 ne LAS 24/7/25 Lot, Boiling Point, 174° - 177°(767mm); d}3", 0.85125. Ga, — Aor) er al Aa a aM Both fractions, after being saturated with water, and dis- solved in four times their volume of glacial acetic acid, were treated with bromine at —20°. On standing overnight in the ice chest, characteristic crystals of limonene tetra- bromide separated, which, on isolation, drying and recrystallisation from ethyl acetate, melted sharply at 104°. Determination of Safrol.—The fractions distilling between 106°-112° were placed in a bath of solid carbon dioxide, and the frozen mass transferred to a Buchner filter funnel surrounded with a mixture of ice and salt. The crude safrol thus obtained was further purified by redistil- lation. It gave the following constants on examination, VIZ. :— B.pt. 109°— 110° (10mm); Melting point +11°, d32°, 1.1045;: 20° kd 20° aXe 4-0"; one, dubge2. The filtrate from the solid safrol was found to be free from methyl eugenol, and to consist mainly of safrol with a little sesquiterpene. The identity of this phenol ether was confirmed by boiling - ona sand tray, for a prolonged period, 30 c.c. of the purified safrol in 200 ¢.c. of ethyl alcohol containing 8 grams of sodium in solution. The iso-safrol obtained gave the fol- lowing results on examination, viz :— B.pt. 1203° — 122° (10mm); d24°, 1.123; n°, 1.5740 On oxidation with chromic acid in glacial acetic acid. solution solid heliotropine was obtained, which, on purifica- tion through the bisulphite compound, melted sharply at 37°. THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. 231 Determination of Minor Constituents —The residues from the distillation of the Safrol fractions were found to con- tain small. quantities of sesquiterpenes, just detectable by the well-known colour reactions with bromine in acetic acid solution and sulphuric acid in acetic anhydride solution. Phenolic Bodies—The first consignment examined yielded 0.6 gram crude liquid phenol removed from 80 c.e. oil by means of 8°4 sodium hydroxide solution. It pos- sessed a refractive index of 1.51380 and gave a brillant orange red colouration with ferric chloride in alcoholic solution, and formed an ammonium salt melting at 132°- 133°. It bore a close resemblance to the remarkable con- stituent isolated from the oil of Backhousia angustifolia by means of 8°4 sodium hydroxide solution and tentatively termed a ‘‘phenol’’ (see this Journal, Vol. LVII, 1923, pages 300-312). The last consignment, 24/7/’25, yielded only 0.1% crude liquid phenol, giving an indifferent colour reaction with ferric chloride in alcoholic solution, and apparently was in no way related to that isolated from the first distillate. Paraffin —The residues from the distillation of the frac- tions rich in safrol were found to contain small quantities of paraffin, which, on purification from alcohol, melted at 65-66°. Boroma pinnata (Smith). Previous attempts to determine the identity of the prin- cipal terpene were unsuccessful (see this Journal, Vol. LV. (1921), pages 199-200), but recently a small yield of limonene tetrabromide of melting point 104° was obtained from the terpene fraction. This offers confirmation of the identity of the principal terpene with limonene, which body was thought to be present, though no evidence in support could be secured. 232 A. R. PENFOLD. Boronia thujona (Penfold & Welch). Further supplies of the leaves and terminal branchlets from numerous localities have been examined since the publication of this species (see this Journal, Vol. LY. (1921), pages 200-208), and the results obtained have in © every instance confirmed those originally published. A consignment of leaves from Pymble, N.S.W., gave the highest yield obtained to date with fresh material, viz., 0.8%. The author had the pleasure of examining the shrub in the field, both at Woodburn and Wardell, Richmond River district, New South Wales, in May, 1924, where the plants were found to be in all respects similar to those growing in the neighbourhood of Sydney. The late W. Bauerlen collected a specimen of this Boronia at Wardell as far back as the year 1893. It was of interest to observe all three species, B. pinnata (Smith), B. safrolifera (Cheel) and B. thujona, growing in close proximity to one another at Broadwater, Richmond River, N.S.W. Boroma Muelleri (Cheel). Great difficulty was experienced in securing further sup- plies of the leaves and terminal branchlets of this species, but a small quantity was received on the 9th November, 1925, from Miss C. C. Currie, Lardner, Victoria, through the good offices of the Victorian Forestry Commission. The material received was in full bloom, being the most heavily blossom laden pinnate leaf Boronia, especially at the ter- minals, which I have handled to date. The flowers were much paler in colour than those of B. thujona. Experimental. Sixteen lbs. weight of leaves and terminal branchlets on steam distillation yielded 0.6% of highly refracting and fluorescent oil, yellow in colour, and heavier than water. It gave the following results on examination, viz. :— dis°, 1.0265 ; ans +1.50° ; cee A. 5150. Soluble in 0.8 vol. 80° alcohol, ste No. 20.5. Ester No. after acetylation, 34.7. 233 THE ESSENTIAL OIL OF A NEW BORONIA. CHILE TAuqoW x0 sousseid ey} 04 elauaord eup ‘jusosaaony A[su014s o10M Sotoeds anoj ie WIOIJ S[IO 9], ‘ozo ‘uTgesed ‘sorpoq o1jousqd ‘euodseyinbses ‘euououy, “(%og— Gz) oases uyeaed pus auedzeymnbses (%og—08) euolny,y, g pue v aqeyoor [AURIS puv joruvases ‘ouould-v-p “(%06— OL) UloIME | ulered ‘ouedsoqyinbses ‘oueurd-v-p ‘oueuowr1y] *‘squUON4Iysuog 0929'T oe Tl — 04 0} GSZG'T o98 — 9S0'T %9'0 04 S°0 ShSP'l | obS'9G — ZS16.0 04 04 04 9ZSP'T oot ie 1ZI6o0 | %8'0 4 9°0 OSIS'T Sse te ¢9Z0'T 0} 03 04 'eZI19'T OG Leas LETO'T | %LS°0 04 8E°0 CZ8P'I | 83st — L168°0 04 04 04 ZOLP'I oLb- | P8280 | XT'0 04 Z0'0 |" 024 oe? otP | TO PIOLA CO ‘puspsy negate WOIJ) V5, TBA is “-nuolny, DiwoL0g ~ (TA pue plojuez) puoiny, DiUoLog ([20qD) WAIN VwU0L0g (q310I1g) pyouurd viwo10g -Soroedy JO oUIBNT ‘VINOYOd HO SHIONdS — WOUA STIO TVILNASSA AHL dO AUVNWOAS—'I Tava Dot A. R. PENFOLD. 23 ¢.c. on distillation under reduced pressure gave the following results, viz :— Commenced to distil at 55° (8 mm.). 2 c.e. distilled below 130° (6 mm.). 20 c.c. distilled between 130°-149° (5 mm.) principally at 140°-144° (5 mm.). dis? ae 0° D The first fraction had 0.9236 + 7.6° LA ya2 andthe second G2. “Ra i05385 +0.6° 1.5212 Determination of Elemicin.—The presence of this phenol ether in quantity (in the crude oil equal to about 90%) was confirmed by oxidation of 16 ¢.c. with alkaline potas- sium permanganate according to the procedure outlined in the author’s paper on the ‘‘Essential oil of Backhousia myrtifolia’’ published in this Journal, Vol. LVI. (1922), page 128. The crystals of trimethylgallic acid, weighing 6 grams, were recrystallised from ethyl alcohol, when they melted at 169-170°. Titration with semi-normal alkali solution showed the acid to be monobasic, with a molecular weight of 213. C,,H,,0; requires 212. The ether soluble acid, weighing 2 grams, was recrystallised from ethyl alcohol and melted at 119°-120°. It proved to be trime- thylhomogallic acid, as titration with semi-normal alkali solution showed it to have a molecular weight of 227. C,,H,,0; requires 226. The above results confirm those published by the late H. G. Smith in the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria, Vol. XXXII. (1919). The quantity of Elemicin in the later distillation, 90%, was much higher than that referred to in the above publication, 70%. My thanks are due to the Botanists and to the Forestry Departments men- tioned in the paper for valuable advice and assistance in the identification and procuring of the plant material examined, and to Mr. F. R. Morrison, A.A.C.1., F.CS8., Assistant Economic Chemist, for much assistance in the chemical examination of the essential oils. DEFECTIVE OREGON. 235+ AN EXAMINATION OF DEFECTIVE OREGON (PSEUDOTSUGA TAXIFOLIA). M: B. WELCH: B:Sce., A.I.C., Economic Botanist, Technological Museum. With Plates XXI-XXIII. (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, 5th Dec., 1928.) Oregon or Douglas Fir, Pseudotsuga taxifolia (Lam.) Britton (P. Douglasti Carr), is usually regarded as a strong: tough wood and is used extensively in building construc- tion for scantlings, scaffoldings, ete. Recently an Oregon back stay of an electric derrick crane, which was being used in demolition work, broke suddenly and without warning, whilst under load, resulting in a very serious accident. The defective timber was submitted by the Seaffolding and Lifts Branch of the Department of Labour and Industry of New South Wales for examination. Since Oregon is: used so largely for purposes in which it is subjected to: heavy loads, it was thought advisable to examine the wood fairly thoroughly in order to determine, if possible, the: eause of failure. The wood appeared to be quite normal and its external appearance gave no indication of its brittleness. The broken wood showed a typically brash failure which was almost without splinters and unlike the ‘‘long-fibre: break’’ usually obtained for Oregon. Brashness or brittle- ness is a most serious defect in timber, since under load the wood is liable to fail suddenly and the absence of warning often results in serious consequences ; the wood is especially’ hable to rupture under sudden or impact loads. 236 M. B. WELCH. The following mechanical tests were made :— Static bending tests. Static bending tests on 3” x 3” x 36” span, centre load. ‘The test pieces were cut to this size to include as much as possible of the cross section of the beam, which measured 7.6” x 6.6.” Four test pieces were therefore obtained. it EK D rpu.. LOW. ae 1 7000 1,700,000 32.4 6.3 24 14.9 2 9000 1,660,000 33.0 8.5 24 15.1 3 8600 1,730,000 33.1 8.0 20 14.6 4 8000 1,720,000 34.4 Ou 26 14.6 Mean 8150 1,703,000 33.2 8.0 25 14.8 f = Modulus of Rupture in lbs. per sq. in. E = Modulus of Elasticity in lbs. per sq. in. D Weight per cubic foot at time of testing; air dry volume and weight. | Y.p.1. = Average number of growth rings per inch. ‘L.W. = Percentage of late or summer wood in the erowth ring. M = Moisture percentage on the dry weight. ‘The proportional limit was not clearly defined in tests. ‘The failures were carroty and the wood failed in tension without warning. Two static bending tests were made on the full-sized ‘timber with a span of six feet, centre loading. f E rp. Lowe | 1 4890 1,570,000 Max.10 ) 14.5 26.2 2 7680, 570 COON Nin | 5a 15.0 Mean 6285 — 1,570,000 8.5 assay spel The proportional limit was not defined. The failures -~were sudden, partially in tension and horizontal shear, and ‘definitely indicated the brashness of the wood. DEFECTIVE OREGON. 237 Additional static bending tests were made subsequently, on 2” x 2” x 28” span*. It will be noted that the moisture content has decreased. W. W.to f1 a E Vile Dey) eps ewe MM. fa50 7930 1,870,000 1.58 2.08 32.0 80 243 138.0: 7980 8820 1,890,000 Sie, 2b Sw oes, » 90" | 28:4 F128 7350 7480 1,810,000 1:63 "1945 32-6 §8.0 28:0) 12.2 7140 «F715 ~=61,580,000 1.79 2.40 31.3. 65 24.8. 12.7 W450 7990. 1,790,000 1.72 2.25 -81.9 74 264 12.7 ee ng = Fibre stress at proportional limit in lbs. per square inch. W.toP.L. = Work to proportional limit in inch lbs. per cubic inch. W. to M.L. = Work to maximum load in inch lbs. per cubie inch. For comparison the results of the following static bending tests are given, made on small clear specimens from the Technological Museum. 3” x 38” x 86” span centre load. a E D. TDs L.W. M. 1 11,620 2,260,000 34.7 16.0 39.6 1224. 2 12,660 2,330,000 Bia 20.5 36.9 12.6: 3 18,580 1,670,000 Base 1270 34.5 11.3 4 13,060 2,010,000 BVA 145) 28.6 10.9 5 10,520 1,800,000 36.5 6.5 38.4 12.4 6 8,400 1,770,000 Bore 4.0 35.8 11.9: 7 7,660 1,330,000 26.4 4.0 25.2 12.0: Mean 11,070 1,800,000 30.0 11.0 31.4 11.9 es —— eee ————e The following static bending tests were made on 2” x 2” x 28” span clear specimens. * Tests marked * have been made in conformity with the specification adopted for testing small clear specimens of timber and described in U.S.D.A. Forest Service Bull. 108, and subse- quently in Projects I. of the Canadian Forest Product Labora- tory and also of the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research, Forest Products Research, of Great Britain, 1928.. “238 M. B. WELCH. f E D Pupil. M Maximum .. 14,730 2,350,000 35.6 35 14.2 Dinimum., 3,800 1,290,000 24.8 17 9.8 Mean 12 tests 11,520 1,790,000 31.9 22. 1 vane Canadian’ and American®) mean tests for static bending tests on 2” x 2” x 28” span air dry clear specimens are as follows :— W.to W. to fel f E P.L. M.L. D+ r.p.i. L.W. M. Mountain (1) 8,460 18,340 1,664,000 2.44 8.40 31.4 26.2 25.0 9.5 Mountain (1) 9,540 13,620 1,806,000 2.86 11.80 338.2 17.4 32.0 10.7 ‘Coast (1) 8,990 14,050 2,142,000 2.20 9.90 33.4 1333 38.0 11.1 Wyoming (2) 6,900 10,300 1,460,000 1.83 6.5 338.6 22.0 27.0 9.4 ‘Oregon (2)10,600 14,000 2,210,000 2.94 8.4 38.1 13.0 35.0 6.2 U.S.A. (3) 5,065 6,777 1,858,000 —— 31.0 12.2 41.0 14.9 (1) Some Commercial Softwoods of Canada. Forest Service Bulletin No. 78, Dept. of Interior, Canada, 1927. (2) Mechanical Properties of Woods grown in U.S.A. Newlin and Wilson, U.S. Dept. of Agric. Forest Service, Bull. 556, 1917. ‘(3) Mean figures for 5” x 8” beams. Tests on Structural timbers. Cline and Heim, U.S. Dept. of Agric. Forest Ser- vice, Bull. 108, 1912. + Corrected to 12% moisture. Impact Tests. Izod impact tests were made in conformity with the British Engineering Standard Association Specification for Aircraft Material. Energy absorbed in foot Ibs. E Wale M Maximum Se mice ane S 9 — Minimum Sacer 2 7 — Mean 6 tests .. .. 8.3 7.8 hoy ‘Tests made on Oregon in stock gave the following results: Tp. M D “Maximum 2s) 280 tty lbs. 935 9 (1nd ai Ae ine Minimum PUR IME MRAM. Af 5) ame nnn IE 9 8. ey ee “Mean (12 tests) .. 230.,,.,, 22, 10,624) eeu 9713300 Ibs. ,, DEFECTIVE OREGON. 939 *Compression parallel to grain. C1 C E cpa. M Maximum ... 5,500 7430 1,250,000 9 — Mommum .. 3,875 6230 833,000 6.5 — Mean (6 tests) 4,685 6695 999,000 85 12.7 C1 = Fibre stress at limit of proportionality in lbs. per square inch. C = Maximum crushing strength in lbs. per square inch. Canada (l.c.) .. 4220 7600 2,229,000 19 10.4 meses, (.c.) .. 7290 8885 — 17.5 ee: *Compression perpendicular to grain. Fibre stress at hmit of proportionality in lbs. per sq. in.: Lost. ommum .. 2... 1440 8.5 — fom .. wl 1325 6.0 — Mean (5 tests) .... 1370 ead) era A M@amada (l.e.) .. .. 997 19 10.4 eee ic.) ous 860 17.5 diate Tension parallel to gran. Area Breaking Load in in sq. in. lbs. per sq. in. Ppa. M i 0.7651 3850 9:0 14.1 2 0.7548 6995 9.0 12.8 3 0.7466 7640 1.0 14.1 4 0.7698 8060 10.5 29 Mean 6636 9.0 13.5 Koehlert gives the following mean figures for tension parallel to grain. 1. 16,200 lbs. sq. in. M2417, D = 33 Ibs. ee M—25.07, D = 30 lbs. + Koehler Properties and Uses of Woods, 1924. 240 M. B. WELCH. *Tension perpendicular to grain. T(a) T(b) r.p.l (aye 2 pate Maximums):.. 52%) 300 470 7.5 9 —~ Minimum. i 115 272 6.5 6.5 — Nean- Gi tests). 24) A777 305 ee 7.8 12.7 T =Tensile strength in lbs. per sq. in. (a) = Plane of failure radial. (b) == Plane of failure tangential. (a) & (b) Canada (l.c.) i a OO 19 10.4 U:S.A. (Le.) JIL et eo) 1% 7.8 * Hardness. H(a) H (b) H(e) Maximum.) ss O00 610 660 Nomimnaume 9 tr. 08 DOU) 780 Mean (7 tests) .. 548 (5tests) 589 (7 tests) 716 H =Load required to imbed a 0.444 inch ball to half diameter. (a) — Radial surface; (b) = tangential surface; (c) = end. surface. Canada (le.) .. 683 691 799 U.S.A. (Le.) ae (a) & (b) 575 670. *Shearing Strength parallel to grain. rp (a) (b) (a) (b) M Maximum .. 1490 1420lbs.persq.in. 8 10 — Minimum ... 812 1030>,. ,,..,..5. Gene Mean (6 tests) 1190 1266 ,, ,, 5, 5 (ogee (a) Plane of failure radial. | (b) Plane of failure tangential. Canada (l.c.) .. > (a) &(b) 1271 19 10.4 USA, Che.) Poo. 6a) Galas) 1140 W3 5 TS DEFECTIVE OREGON. 241 *Cleavage. pl. S(a) S(b) (a) (b) M Maximum pte cee Bo) 140 SA). 80.0) — Minimum fer se 1720) 160 6.0 ~~ 6.5 — Mean (6 tests) .. 141 52 ee © ne 12.7 S = Splitting Strength in lbs. per in. of width. (a) = Plane of failure radial. (b) = Plane of failure tangential. Canada (l.c.) .. -(a) & (b) 265 19 10.4 U.S.A. (l.c.) .. Cleavage tests for air dry wood not given. One of the most important requirements in a timber which is subject to loads is toughness}. The term is apphed to a number of different properties of wood, but can be regarded as the reverse of brittleness ; it is indicated by (a) the ability of the wood to absorb energy in impact tests, (b) the work to maximum load in static bending tests. An examination of the results of the static bending tests shows that the modulus of rupture is small in comparison with the other tests on small clear specimens, but the figure is not abnormally low. The most striking result is the small interval between the proportional limit and the ultimate load, which is a definite indication of brittleness. Further, although the resilience of the wood is normal, the ‘‘work to maximum load’’ is very low, indicating again a brittle timber. Similarly, the impact tests, with an + Den Berger, Mechanical Properties of Dutch East Indian Timbers, No. 12. Proefstation v/h. Boschwezen, 1926, refers to a tough wood as “one that will not rupture until it has de- formed considerably under loads at or near its maximum strength or one which still hangs together after it has been ruptured and may be bent back and forth without breaking apart, and which gives way only gradually and gives warning of rupture. It is able to store a considerable amount of energy and has a remarkable shock resisting ability.” P—December 5, 1928. 242 M. B. WELCH. energy absorption of 8.3 foot lbs. in comparison with 23.0 foot lbs. for normal Oregon, clearly show the brashness of the wood. Except that the wood failed, almost without warning and with no defined lmit of proportionality, the large beam tests did not reveal any serious lack of strength, in compari- son with large beam tests made in U.S.A. The stiffness of the wood, indicated by the modulus of elasticity, was not low in comparison with many other of the test results. Tests made in compression parallel to the grain showed ‘that the wood was not particularly weak in this regard, and that there is a very appreciable difference between ‘the limit of proportionality and the ultimate load, although. less than that given for the Canadian tests. The strength in compression perpendicular to the grain was higher than the means given by other authorities and seems to indicate that the ability of the tracheids to with- stand lateral crushing is not weakened, however brittle the ‘wood might be. As Record* states, the tensile strength, parallel to the grain, of a wood is about three times its strength in com- pression, but the results of the tests show that there is practically no difference in the figures for tension and compression obtained for the defective Oregon, whilst the results given by Koehler (l.¢.) clearly show the very great superiority in tensile strength of normal Oregon. It is easy to understand, therefore, that whilst with normal wood it is possible to bend it considerably before failure takes place on the tension side, in wood which has the tensile strength approximately equal to the compressive strength, very slight bending is sufficient for the wood to fail on the tension side and the wood is therefore brittle. * Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood, 1914. huge DEFECTIVE OREGON. 243 The results of the tension perpendicular to the grain, with a radial plane of failure are low and indicate a small degree of lateral cohesion between the tracheids or that the eell walls are easily split when subjected to a transverse pull. The greater strength in tension in a radial direction, j.e., with a tangential plane of failure, is apparently due to the action of the medullary rays. The hardness tests, whilst lower than the Canadian tests, care close to those for the U.S.A. wood, for the side, and higher for the end, and show that the wood was not soft or spongy. As pointed out by Record (l.c.) resistance to indentation is largely dependent on density. The results of the shearing tests parallel to grain are quite normal and do not indicate any weakness in this Tespect. Strength to resist splitting, as indicated by the cleavage tests, is comparable with tension perpendicular to the grain. ‘The results of this series of tests (1.e., cleavage) are also low in comparison with the Canadian figures. Weight. One of the most important factors influencing the ‘strength of timber is weight. In practice, weakness in timber is usually associated with a low density and relation- ships have been established between the various mechanical properties of wood and specific gravity® ft. The density of the defective wood, about 33 lbs. per cubic foot, is not low and compares closely with the average figures given for the material tested in Canada and U.S.A., and it also approximates to the mean of the specimens * The relation of the shrinkage and strength properties of wood to its specific gravity. Newlin and Wilson, U.S. D.A. - Forest Service Bull. No. 676, 1919. + Den Berger (l.c.) outlines the various theories in reference ‘to the mechanical properties—-density relationship. 244 M. B. WELCH. tested for comparison. There was no evidence of compres- sion wood, which is comparatively weak. Den Berger (l.¢.) has pointed out that specific gravity does not give any clue to the phability or toughness of the wood and this is borne out by the result of the impact tests. Rate of Growth. From a large series of tests on structural sizes made in U.S.A.¢ the optimum rate of growth for Oregon was found to be 24 rings per inch, but considerable variation in strength was found, and the conclusion was reached that ‘‘yines per inch are not a reliable index to the mechanical properties of timber, especially structural timbers contain- ing knots and other defects.’’ Further, in particular ref- erence to Oregon, the following conclusion was made that,. ‘‘in general, rapidly grown wood (less than eight rings per inch) is relatively weak. 10 92 65 20 Br wheated: Pulp .. .. 4.0 i 0 21 — — 3 Pulp from good can _ 6 3 1 rir — = Ae eeslumy Pulp, .. .. 400— 130, 82 1600 81 154 5 Pulp from burst can 274 23 OF e100 — a *From pulping machine. == Brom vat. These counts agree fairly well with those made in the United States although the direct method shows slightly greater numbers. Samples (4) and (5) would be quite unfit for human consumption. The higher counts by the direct method are probably to be accounted for by the fact that in this method all cells in the field are counted, regardless of whether they are dead or alive, whereas in the dilution method, only the live cells produee colonies. 344 G. L. WINDRED. It will be noticed that there is a striking decrease in “numbers in the heated pulp and the 4,500,000 per c.e. prob- ably results, for the most part, from the subsequent germi- nation of the spores. The rise to 6,000,000 in sample (3) may be similarly accounted for or may be due to contact with unsterile surfaces as would be presented by the buckets and the containers. With such numbers of bacteria as occurred in samples (4) and (5) it is only to be expected that profound changes would occur in the pulp, spoiling it for further use. Qualitative Determinations. From the plates used in the counting by the dilution method, nine different colonies were selected for identifi- cation. Standard agar slopes were made from the colonies and after incubating at 32°C. for 24 hours were replated in order to test purity of the cultures. A pure culture of each organism having been obtained, the cultural, morphological and biochemical characters of each were studied according to the procedure advised by the Society of American Bacteriologists. The organisms were named according to the scheme set out in Bergey’s Manual (2) further corroboration being obtained from the more detailed descriptions in the Journal of Bacteriology (3). The following organisms were identified :— 1. Bacillus vulgatus Flugge. megatheritum De Bary. niger Migula. . graveolens Gittheil. ellenbachiensis Stutzer. . atterimus Leh. and New. subtilis (Ehrenberg) Cohn.. mycoides Fliugge. . Aerobacter cloacae. CMI wh wh by bu by by ty ty by ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. 345 It will be noted that none of these are known to be pathogenic, and also, that all except Aerobacter cloacae are spore formers and therefore quite capable of withstanding the temperature of the heating vat and so of being able to germinate when the temperature of the pulp falls, which is after the cans have been sealed. It is also significant that all of them produce acid from carbohydrates and as will be seen later this has a bearing on the bursting of the cans. Now since Aerobacter cloacae does not produce spores its presence in a sample of heated pulp has to be accounted for. Members of this group have been found in pasteurised milk so that it is capable of withstanding fairly high tem- peratures. Otherwise it may gain access to the cans by leaks in faulty cans, or may enter before the can is sealed and after it has cooled considerably. Slime Production. Pulp which has become slimy has a very characteristic appearance somewhat resembling a thick starch paste but more coherent. When the slimy condition is at its maxi- mum and most viscous, it is not possible to lift it up with a fork or glass rod as it slips off or breaks away. The cohesion is sufficient, however, to allow slime-threads of about 10 em. to be drawn out. An organism was isolated from a sample of slimy pulp and numbered 10. Small portions of the slimy pulp were plated by the usual methods and with the exception of a few colonies of a mucor species, which always seems to be associated with the slimy condition, the bacterial colonies were all of the same appearance. Thus the slimy pulp was practically a pure culture of No. 10. After the isolation of this organism and its transfer to standard agar slopes a test tube full of sterile pulp was inoculated with a heavy dose of organism. The slimy condi- 346 G. L. WINDRED. tion appeared in 72 hours at room temperature (18°C.) After a period of about 17 days the condition began to dis- appear (of course the duration of the sliminess would depend on many factors such as temperature, mass of pulp, amount of inoculum, ete.). With the gradual disappear- ance of the slime, a layer of clear amber coloured liquid appeared on the surface of the pulp. At the end of 32 days the sliminess had quite disappeared and the layer of clear liquid occupied about one quarter of the test-tube. The sedimented pulp became much lighter in colour and had a flocculent appearance. There was a very noticeable sour odour following the disappearance of the slime, other- wise the material remained differentiated into clear super- natant fluid and flocculent ‘‘precipitate’’ till the end of the experiment, i.e., for six weeks, without marked change. On plating out some of this material the same colony for- mation was noticed as at first and on re-inoculating some sterile pulp with this inoculum the slimy condition was again produeed. Thus it is highly probable that this organism, No. 10, is the cause of the sliminess. However, since no capsule or envelope could be demonstrated round the organism it is assumed that it is not the organism itself which brings about the slimy condition, but rather some product of its metabolism. The following is a brief deseription of No. 10:— Morphology.—Long rods with rounded ends, measuring 4u by .754 on an average. Shadow forms common. Arranged singly or in long chains. Spore-formation. Forms spores early, central in position and sometimes excentric. Cause slight bulge in organism. Average measurement of 1.54 by .du. Mobility.—Very active in young cultures. Flagella peri- trichous and numerous. ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. 347 Agur Slope.—Moderate growth with a well defined ridge. Tends to spread giving in older cultures a rhizoid appear- ance. Opaque, raised, smcoth, membranous, moist and pure white. Agar Colonies.—Rapid growth. Different forms, some round and regular, others amoeboid. Surface smooth, moist, glistening, raised, opaque and pure white. A ridge appears near the periphery giving a shallow crater-like appearance. Gelatine Stab.—Growth best at the top. Line of puncture filiform. Liquefaction infundibuliform. Medium liquefied fairly rapidly. Broth.—A fragile pellicle formed with shght turbidity near surface. Clears by sedimentation. Long chains. Potato.—Creamy-white profuse growth, spreading, raised, glistening, very rugose, slimy, membranous consistency. Decided odour. Glucose Agar.—Rapid growth, filiform but spreading. Flat, dull, rugose, opaque, cream, butyrous. Gram Stain.—Positive. Glucose Broth—Acid, no gas. Lactose Broth.—Alkaline, no gas. Sucrose Broth.—Aeid, no gas. Milk.—Rapid casein digestion with clear, amber-coloured fluid in upper part of tube. Intmus Milk.—Slightly acid in 48 hours with slight coagulation followed by digestion. Pigment.—None. This description resembles closely that of Bacillus rumi- natus Gottheil except that it forms long chains in broth and milk. Also, in agar colonies, no shell-like periphery 348 G. L. WINDRED. was observed as has been attributed to B. ruminatus. In all other characters, however, it resembles fairly closely this Species and may be a variety of it. Many cans, both the large kerosene cans and the smaller sizes show a swelling due to increase of internal pressure. At times this pressure increases to such an extent that the can bursts, and in the case of the large bulk cans, with such a force that the whole stack may be thrown down. A large proportion of kerosene-cans of pulp burst, owing, probably, to the fact that they are not so well made as the smaller two-pound tins. The gas may be produced in two ways: (1) by the action of the Coli group of organisms on the carbohydrates of the pulp thus liberating CO, and H,, and (2) by the action of the acid juices on the metal of the container (4). In the first case when tins of sterile pulp were inoculated | with a vigorous culture of Aerobacter cloacae and incubated at 37°C. the cans became swollen and burst in 17 days. Since this organism produces both CO, and acid in the pulp, the pressure caused by the CO, is augmented by the hbera- tion of hydrogen by the action of the acid produced on the metal of the container. This pressure is sufficient to burst open the seams of a two-pound ean. In the second ease all the organisms isolated produced acid so that if any great number of organisms remain in the ean after processing there is the possibility of them produc- ing enough acid to attack untinned portions of the ean and thus liberate hydrogen. The pulp itself shows an acidity of 0.45%, calculated as citrie acid, so that together with the products of the bacteria present a considerable acidity may develop, which, if not sufficient to produce enough gas to burst the can, may bulge the ends of the ean considerably. ORGANISMS OF TOMATO PULP. o49 Summary. Great losses occur due to microbial spoilage of tomato- pulp. Counts of organisms in five samples of tomato-pulp were made including material from burst cans and slimy pulp. Very large numbers of bacteria were present in the last mentioned samples. Ten organisms were isolated from pulp, nine of which are spore-formers, the remaining one being Aerobacter cloacae. An organism which causes sliminess in the pulp resembles Bacillus rununatus Gottheil very closely. Characteristics of the organism are described. Gas production causing bursting of the cans is due to two causes, (1) the action of acid on the metal of the con- tainer, and (2) the production of CO, by bacteria. (Communicated by Gilbert Wright.) This investigation was carried out in the Faculty of Agri- culture, University of Sydney, under the direction of Mr. G. Wright. Acknowledgments are due to Professor R. D. Watt for reviewing the manuscript. LITERATURE CITATIONS. (1) HOWARD, B. J.—Microscopical studies on tomato products. ess Dept. Aor, Bul. 581, 1917. (2) BERGEY, D. H.—Manual of determinative bacteriology, 1923. 1st ed. Baltimore. Williams and Wilkins Co. (3) LAURENCE, J. S., and FORD, W. W.—Aerobic, spore- bearing, non-pathogenic bacteria. Jnl. Bact. (Balt.), Voll. INO. 3, pp. 213-519,. May, 1916: LAUBACH, C. A., and RICH, J. L.—Aerobic, spore-form- ing, non-pathogenic bacteria. Jnl. Bact. (Balt.), vol. I, No. 5; pp. 493-5382, Sept., 1916. (4) BIGELOW, W. D.—Springers and perforations in canned foods. Nat. Canners’ Res. Lab. Cire. 1-L, 1922. (5) CRUESS, W. V.—Commercial fruit and vegetable products, 1925, ist. ed. New York, McGraw Hill Book Co. 300 M. B. WELCH. NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS OF THE MONIMIACEA. M. B. WELCH, -B:Se,, AGN. Economic Botanist, Technological Museum. (With Plates XXVI.-XXIX.) (Read before the Royal Society of New South Wales, Dec. 5, 1928.) Several Australian genera belonging to the Moninuacee, a family principally occurring in tropical and subtropical regions, yield useful timbers. Of the eight Australian genera* recorded by Bentham, two are woody climbers, whilst several are too rare to be of commercial importance. The Australian representatives are chiefly confined to the eastern rain forest areas of the mainland, with one genus, Atherosperma, occurring in Tasmania. The following anatomical descriptions apply to specimens of the various woods in the Technological Museum collection. DORYPHORA SASSAFRAS, Endlicher. Sassafras, Grey or Black Sassafras. A medium-sized tree found in the brush forests and on alluvial pockets in gullies, throughout eastern New South Wales and extending into southern Queensland. The wood is very close textured, almost ‘‘pine-like,’’ and pale yellowish in colour, becoming darker on _ exposure. ‘Occasionally dark, irregular streaks are present, especially near the heart, which is occasionally almost jet black. The freshly sawn wood, or even a fresh surface on seasoned wood, usually possesses a pleasant safro!-like * Bentham, G. Flora Australiensis, Vol. 5, p. 283, 1870. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 301 odour, but this is soon lost on exposure. The wood is not particularly durable, but is apparently immune from attacks by borers, whilst it is said to resist white ants. It works easily, is not fissile, but is inclined to be woolly. The wood is usually without distinctive figure. The weight is moderate, from 30-40 Ibs. per cubic foot. Average laterai hardness = 975 lbs.t Uses—Available in fairly large quantities and chiefly used for broom handles, brush stocks, stained for cheap furniture, toys, flooring, lining, case material. It is very suitable for automatic turnery. It has also been used for clothes-pegs and tallow cask staves. Source of material examined: Museum collection; trade supplies. Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, indistin- oulishable with the naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays easily visible on end section or on a radial face, some- what lehter in colour than ground tissue. Growth rings not distinct. Microscopical Characters. — Pores evenly distributed, usually single or in small groups of 2 or 3, frequently showing partitions due to sealariform bars, occasionally in rows, but more usually separated by very much compressed tracheidal cells; irregularly polygonal or rounded in out- line; radial diameter 45-140u, mean 90; tangential diameter 35-110u, mean 65y; length of vessel segments, 900-2500-; walls 234; end perforation strongly scalariform, bars numerous, up to 100, with correspondingly very taper- ing segment end; lateral pits few, small-bordered, circular, irregularly arranged, or numerous large, simple, oval or slit-like and scalariform in contact with rays, inter vessel + Hardness figure is the load required to imbed 0.444” ball to half depth. 352 M. B. WELCH. pits scalariform bordered; average number per sq. mm. 65; tyloses not observed. Wood fibres very variable in shape and size, thick-walled, often very long, measuring from 1000-2800; average diameter 30y, walls 7-llp; pit open- ings slit-hke, more or less bordered; transition observed to more copiously pitted tracheidal cells, especially in contact with vessels; frequently septate. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse, often appearing as heavily-pitted, septate, prosenchymatous units; usually present in radial rows. which correspond to the attenuated ends of the rays, but are not continuous when seen in transverse section. Rays strongly heterogeneous, uniseriate or usually biseriate or triseriate, up to 554 in width and 2000, in height, ends tapering to narrow cells corresponding in width to the vertical elements of the wood; thus the normal width of a horizontal ray cell is about 40u; at the ends of the ray the cells usually become almost square and may become drawn out to a vertical height of as much as 300» and 20-30» in width, or two multiseriate portions may be linked with a single row of vertically elongated cells; 3-5 per mm. of transverse section. Aqueous extract very light brown, very little alteration with ferric chloride, caustic potash, turbid with lead acetate. When burnt, smoulders to greyish-white ash with small amount of unburnt carbon. ATHEROSPERMA MOSCHATUM, Labillardiere. Tasmanian Sassafras. A large tree, up to 100 feet in height, found in moist gullies principally throughout Tasmania and also in southern and eastern Victoria and in the south-eastern part of New South Wales. ny NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 355 The wood is almost white to light brown in colour, but often with dark streaks or zones near the heart, close- textured, often resembling European Maple or Sycamore, Acer sp. It is without odour, although the bark is very aromatic; works easily and cleanly, and is altogether a very useful timber. There is usually no pronounced figure, although on a tangentially cut or ‘‘backed-off’’ surface the variation in density in the growth ring causes a slight ‘‘ribbon grain.’’ The wood is tough, not fissile, not durable in exposed positions, and is lable to attack by the Furni- ture Beetle, Anobium domesticum. Average lateral hardness = 10385 lbs. Weight = 87-41 Ibs. per cubic foot. Uses.—An excellent timber for automatic turnery, e.g., small handles, ete., and is probably the best Australian wood for eclothes-pegs. It has been used for interior fittings, cabinet work, brush stocks, light handles, wooden screws, cask staves, wooden buckets, finishing lasts, carving. Source of material examined: Museum collection; trade supphes. | Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, not distin- sulshable with naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays fine, evenly distributed, easily visible on end or radial surfaces, appearing somewhat darker than the ground tissue. Growth rings not prominently defined. Sapwood not defined. Microscopical Characters. — Pores evenly distributed, frequently single or in groups of 2-4 irregularly arranged, not in radial rows, irregularly polygonal in outline; radial diameter 35-854, mean, 554; tangential diameter 30-55n, mean 45; length of vessel segments 900-1500; walls 2-3 in thickness; end perforation very oblique, strongly sealari- form, not always at end of segment, and sometimes extend- W-— December 5, 1928. 3D4 M. B. WELCH. ing for half its length; bars up to 100 in number; lateral pits elongated, elliptical or slit-hke, often scalariform, small, circular-bordered and few in number in contact with fibres; tyloses not observed; average number per sq. mm., 155. Wood fibres rather thick-walled, véry irregular in size and shape; average diameter 22; 900-2000n in length; wall 5-8; pits small, slit-like, borders usually very distinct ; very rarely septate. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse, chiefly present as non-continucus radial lines corresponding to attenuated ray ends. Rays usually heterogeneous, outer cells often elongated but not so prominently as in D. sassafras, at times almost homogeneous, uniseriate to multi- seriate, as many as 5 cells in width, maximum width 70p; up to 1200 in length but normally not more than 900,; oceasionally ends of rays multiseriate and middle reduced to one cell in width; ray cells frequently with dark granular contents; 4-7 per mm. of transverse section. Growth rings indistinct and due to radial compression of a few rows of wood fibres. Aqueous extract very pale yellow, often turbid due to starch; usually greenish colouration with ferric chloride; darkened with caustic potash; little alteration to marked turbidity with lead acetate. Shavings burn to greyish or white ash; smoulders slowly with medium amount of unburnt carbon. DAPHNANDRA MICRANTHA, Bentham. Yellow-wood, Satin-wood, Yellow or Grey Sassafras, Yellow Box, Socket-wood, Butter-wood. A moderate-sized tree found in the coastal brushes of northern New South Wales and extending into Queensland. The wood is greyish-yellow to yellow in colour, becoming brown on exposure ; close-textured, resembling D. sassafras, but is usually less aromatic in odour, works more cleanly alll NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 355 ‘and is usually rather harder and heavier. It is tough and non-fissile. Usually no pronouneed figure. Average lateral hardness = 1045 lbs.; weight 28-45 lbs. per eubie foot. Uses——Turned articles, small tool handles, door knobs, brush stocks, broom handles, flooring, lining, interior fittings, case material. Source of material examined: Museum collection; ‘Queensland Forest Service. Macroscopical Characters.—Pores very small, not distin- guishable with the naked eye, but easily seen with pocket magnifier. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays fine, but distinct and easily seen on end or radial surfaces, lighter in colour than ground tissue. Growth rings not prominent, usually seen as fine lines. Sapwood not defined. Microscopical Characters.—Pores very evenly distributed, frequently single, or in small groups of 2-5, irregularly rounded or polygonal in outline; radial diameter 20-75z, mean 5d; tangential diameter 20-654, mean 50; length of vessel segments 750-1400; walls 2-34 in thickness; end perforations very oblique, scalariform, bars numerous, up to 50; lateral pits elongated, elliptical or slit-like, often Sealariform ; vessel-fibre pits small, circular, sparsely dis- tributed; tyloses not observed; average number per sq. mm., 100. Wood fibres thick-walled, very irregular in size and shape, average diameter, 30%; 1200-2100» in length; walls 7-11ly; pits slit-like, borders small; fibres occasionally septate. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse, in thick-walled, heavily-pitted septate prosenchymatous units; principally seen in transverse section as discontinuous radial rows due to ray ends. Rays diffuse, heterogeneous; outer cells elongated but much less than in D. sassafras or A. moschatum; usually multiseriate, from triseriate up to six 356 M. B. WELCH. cells in width; diameter up to 110y; length up to 2.0 mm. ;. 3-4 per mm. of cross section. Growth rings marked by radial compression of a few rows of wood fibre cells. Sections cut of the outer part of the wood showed a considerable amount of starch to be present, not only in the rays and longitudinal parenchyma, but also in the thick-walled wood fibres. There seems no doubt but that these cells are used for food storage. Aqueous extract lemon yellow; very little darkening | with ferric chloride or caustic potash; slight turbidity and precipitate with lead acetate. Shavings burn to greyish or white ash, the amount of smouldering and unburnt carbon varying from large to: medium with different samples. DAPHNANDRA REPANDULA, F. v. Mueller. Sassafras or Grey Sassafras. A moderate-sized tree found in the brush forests of northern Queensland. The wood is yellowish to brownish-yellow in colour, close-textured and resembles D. micrantha. Average lateral hardness = 1075 lbs. Weight about 40) Ibs. per cubic foot. Uses.—Similar to D. micrantha. Source of material examined: Queensland Forest Service. Macroscopical Characters Similar to D. micrantha. Microscopical Characters.— Pores evenly distributed, usually irregularly rounded in shape or occasionally angular; single or in irregular groups of 2-5, often in short radial rows or separated by very compressed fibre tracheids; radial diameter 50-110u, mean 65; tangential diameter 35-90, mean 60,4; length of vessel segments 900- NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 357 2100; walls 2-234; end perforation often extremely oblique, scalariform, bars up to 60; lateral pits scalariform, sometimes oval in contact with ray cells, rounded, small and seattered in contact with mechanical tissue; the vessels are often fusiform and differ lttle in size and shape from the larger wood fibres (fibre tracheids) ; tyloses not observed ; average number per sq. mm., 90. Wood fibres thick-walled ; irregular in size and shape; average diameter 30u; length 1500-2700; walls 5-74; pits slit-like, borders very small and at times apparently simple; occasionally septate. ‘Tracheids occasionally present measuring up to 2000u in length, with numerous small bordered pits. Wood parenchyma scanty, diffuse, septate-prosenchymatous, often ‘seen in transverse sections as discontinuous radial rows due to ray ends. Rays diffuse with tendency to become aggregate; heterogeneous, with considerably elongated end ‘cells much more strongly developed than in D. micrantha, the uniseriate portion sometimes extending a _ greater length than the multiseriate part’; usually multiseriate up to 5 cells in width or 75y; occasionally biseriate; up to 3.0 mm. in length; average number per mm. of cross- ‘section, 4. Growth rings not pronounced, due to radial compression of a few rows of cells. Aqueous extract pale yellow, similar to D. micrantha in behaviour with ferric chloride, caustic potash and lead acetate. | Shavings burn to small greyish ash, medium amount unburnt carbon. DAPHNANDRA AROMATICA, Bailey. Sassafras or Grey Sassafras. A moderate-sized tree found in the brush forests of northern Queensland. 358 M. B. WELCH. The wood is yellowish-brown in colour, close-textured, and resembles D. micrantha, except that the Museum specimens: are softer. Average lateral hardness = 560 Ibs. Weight 30-35 lbs. per eubie ft. Uses.—Similar to D. micrantha. Source of material examined: Queensland Forest Service.. Macroscopical Characters.—Practically similar to D. micrantha, but pores rather larger and just visible with naked eye in Museum specimens. Microscopical Characters.—Pores very evenly distributed,,. comparatively even in size, irregularly polygonal; usually single, occasionally in small irregular groups, radial dia- meter 65-1502, mean 90u; tangential diameter 55-1004 mean Tou; length of vessel segments 1200-2000; walls 2-34; end perforations very oblique, strongly scalariform, bars up to- 80; lateral pits, elongated, often scalariform, fibre-vessel pits scattered, circular, bordered; vessels frequently re- semble tracheids in size and shape; tyloses not observed ;, number per sq. mm. 65. Wood fibres moderately thick- walled, irregular in size and shape, average diameter 35p; length 1000-2600u; walls 4-6; pits usually narrow elliptical with distinct borders, but occasionally border not distinct. Wood parenchyma not abundant, diffuse, appearing im radial rows in transverse section due to elongated ray ends ;. rays diffuse, heterogeneous, the uniseriate elongated end cells considerably extended; variable in shape, often with multiseriate ends and uniseriate in middle; up to 4 cells or 60» in width and 1500 in length; 3-5 per mm. of cross section. Aqueous extract pale yellow, similar in behaviour to: D. mocraniha. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 359 Shavings smoulder to smail greyish ash and large amount of unburnt carbon. MOLLINEDIA HUEGELIANA, Tulasne. A small tree, not common in the brushes of eastern New South Wales and Queensiand. fhe wood is yellow brown in colour, often with irregular dark streaks, close textured, moderately hard, tough and non fissile. It possesses a prominent ray figure when quarter Cite Average lateral hardness = 13880 lbs. Weight about 45 Ibs. per cubic foot. Uses.—Rarely seen on the market except in mixed brush- woods. Should be suitable for ornamental turnery, small cabinet work and similar purposes. Souree of material examined: Museum collection. Macroscopical Characters.—Pores indistinguishable with naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays very prominent on end or radial surfaces. Growth rings scarcely defined. Sapwood not defined. Microscopical Characters.—Pores evenly distributed, single or in groups of 2-5, sometimes in radial rows; usually irregularly rounded in shape; radial diameter 22-754, mean oom, tangential diameter 30-754, mean 55yu; vessel segments 660-1400 in length; walls 3-4.5u; end perforation not so oblique as in D. sassafras, sealariform. bars up to 25; lateral pits small rounded or oval, bordered, more crowded than in other species, larger and often scalariform in contact with rays or vessels; tyloses not observed; average number per sq. mm. 59. Wood fibres very thick walled; average dia- meter 30p; length 1000-2200y; walls 5-13y; pits indistinctly bordered, openings slit-like ; septate fibres not seen, but occa- sionally fibres divided into two distinct cells by a transverse 360 M. B. WELCH. wall. Wood parenchyma diffuse, in heavily pitted thick walled prosenchymatous units; or seen in transverse section as radial rows corresponding to ray ends. Rays heterogene- ous; diffuse with tendency to become aggregate; multiseri- ate up to 300 in width and 15mm. in height. Rays per mm. of cross section, 1-3. Growth rings not prominent, indicated by somewhat greater thickening of cell walls. Aqueous extract very pale yellow; very little darkening with ferric chloride or caustic potash; slight turbidity and precipitate with lead acetate. Shavings smoulder to brownish or greyish white ash, with medium amount of unburnt carbon. HEDYCARYA ANGUSTIFOLIA, A, Cunningham. Wild Mulberry. A medium-sized to small tree found in creek beds and guilies in Victoria and eastern New South Wales. The wood is yellow to greyish-brown in colour, close-tex- tured, soft and easily worked, and when of low density inclined to be spongy. Distinct ray figure when quarter- eut. Average lateral hardness = 495 lbs. Weight 22-30 lbs. per cubie ft. Uses.—Rarely seen on the market, suitable for small cabinet work. Source of material examined: Museum collection. Macroscopical Characters.——Pores practically indistin- guishable with naked eye. Soft tissue not apparent. Rays prominent on end or radial surfaces, appearing darker than ground tissue. Sapwood rather paler than heartwood but not sharply defined. Growth rings not prominent. Microscopical Characters——Pores fairly evenly distri- buted, irregularly polygonal in outline, single, or in irregu- lar groups from 2-7, or in short radial rows; radial diameter NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 361 35-105u, mean Tou; tangential diameter 35-854, mean 60y; vessel segments 500-9002; walls 2-3», end perforation oblique, scalariform, bars up to 20 in number; lateral pits large oval or elongated, often becoming scalariform ; vessel- fibre pits small rounded or oval; tyloses not observed ; average number per sq. mm. 30. Wood fibres comparatively thin walled, average diameter 304; 750-1700» in length; walls 3-54 in thickness; occasionally septate; pits small, usually with small borders, occasionally divided into two distinet cells by transverse walls. Wood parenchyma dif- fuse, or in thick walled septate parenchymatous units, cor- responding in size and shape to the fibrous elements; numerous transition stages observed between fibre and parenchymatous cells. Rays heterogeneous, aggregate, oblique sections of vessels or fibres frequently appear 1iso- lated in a tangential section of a ray; multiseriate, up to 390 in width and 3.5 mm. in height; ray volume often very high, especially in specimens of wood with low density ; number per mm. of cross section 1-2. Aqueous extract brownish in colour, brownish or greenish eolouration and precipitate with ferric chloride; brown with caustic potash; slight precipitate with lead acetate. Shavings burn to black residue with little smouldering and no light coloured ash. The following key is given for the identification of the woods :— (a) Rays large and prominent on end or radial face. (b) Rays often exceeding 10 mm. in height = Mol- linedia Hwegeliana. (b,) Rays never exceeding 10 mm. in height = Hedy- cayra angustifolia. (a,) Rays small not prominent on end or radial face. Ld 362 M. B. WELCH. (c) Pores very small, numerous, over 125 per sq. mm., wood pale coloured = Atherosperma mos- chata. (c,) Pores small, less than 125 per sq. mm. wood yellow. (d) Rays not exceeding 3 cells in width = Doryphora sassafras. (d,) Rays often exceeding 8 cells in width. Daphnandra spp. Points of difference between the various species of Daphnandra are given under the descriptions for the indi- vidual species. There are decided variations in ray widths, pores per sq. mm., and pore size, but insufficient samples were available for examination to state definitely whether these characters are constant. Summary. The genera Doryphora, Atherosperma and Daphnandra belonging to the Atherospermew* furnish close textured ‘“pine-hke’’ timbers usually without any characteristic figure, whilst in the Momimiew, Hedycarya, Mollinedia and Kibara possess woods with large prominent rays. Unfor- tunately, no authentic timber specimens of the last genus. were available; the wood is comparatively rare and is not available commercially. The woods are pale in colour, the whitest being Athero- sperma moschatum. Mollinedia Huegeliana is the heaviest and hardest of the group. The growth rings are not defined nor is there usually any distinet sapwood. Dark, occasion- ally almost black, streaks and zones have been observed in Doryphora, Atherosperma, Daphnandra and Mollinedia. The cell walls become dark yellow-brown in colour and the *Bentham and Hooker, genera Plantarum, vol. 3, p. 139, 1883. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN TIMBERS. 363° rays and parenchymatous cells filled with a dark substance. The cause of the stain is apparently fungal. The vessels are in all cases evenly distributed, with decidedly scalariform end perforation, and show extreme elongation, the segments reaching a length of 23 mm. in D. sassafras. The inter-vessel pits are typically scalariform and bordered. The smaller vessel-fibre pits are usually few and scanty in the Atherospermew. The maximum average pore number of 155 per unit area occurs in Atherosperma moschata and the minimum of 30, in Hedycarya angusti- folia. Tyloses were not observed. Typical tracheids are rarely present, the mechanical tis- sue consisting principally of wood fibres (fibre tracheids), usually with very thick walls and more or less developed bordered pits. Solereder* states that the prosenchymatous eround-work of the wood bears simple pits in Hedycarya and Daphnandra, indistinctly bordered pits in Mollinedia and typical bordered pits in Atherosperma and Doryphora. In the material examined bordered pits undoubtedly occur in the fibre tracheids of Daphnandra, but the borders are less distinct in Hedycarya. The degree of development of the border varies considerably in the one species and this feature does not seem to possess any very Important diag- nostic value. Septate wood fibres were found in all genera except Mollinedia. Septate wood fibres with simple pits, recorded by Solereder (l.c.) as occurring in all species, were not found, although prosenchymatous, septate, thick walled, sumply pitted wood parenchymatous elements are present ; these undoubtedly show close affinity between the wood parenchyma and the fibre cells. Further in Daphnandra micrantha, a considerable number of the thick walled fibre * Solereder, Systematic Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. English Translation, Vol. 2, p. 701, 1908. “364 M. B. WELCH. cells contained numerous starch granules; although food storage is supposed to be the function of living cells, there was nothing to distinguish these cells from the typical wood fibres. The fibres reach a considerable length in some spe- cies e.g. 2,800 in Doryphora sassafras and over 24 mm. in Daphnandra repandula and D. aromatica. The wood parenchyma is usually rather sparsely distri- buted, but due to the considerable elongation and attenu- ation of the ends of the: medullary rays, the outer cells correspond in shape and size with the normal vertical parenchyma, and thus bring the rays into very intimate contact with the other elements of the wood. The rays are heterogeneous, with the end attenuation especially developed in Daphnandra aromatica and Dory- phora sassafras and least in Mollinedia Huegeliana. In Mollinedia and Hedycarya the rays reach their maximum width of about 300u, whilst in the other genera examined rarely exceed 100u. The maximum height of 15.0 mm. is found in Mollinedia. The rays do not appear to be more than triseriate in Doryphora and Atherosperma, but ocea- sionally attain a width of six cells in Daphnandra. In conclusion I wish to acknowledge the help given by Messrs. D. Cannon and F. B. Shambler of the Museum Staff in the preparation of the specimens. EXPLANATION OF PLATE. Fig.1.—Doryphora sassafras. Transverse section of wood show- ing even pore distribution; the transverse septa seen in many of the vessels are due to the scalariform bars. The wood fibres are very thick walled. The vessels are frequently only separated by considerably compressed fibre cells. x 37. Fig. 2—Atherosperma moschatum. Transverse section of wood showing even distribution of very small pores. The discontinuous nature of the radial rows of vertically elongated parenchyma due to the attenuated ray ends is clearly indicated. KOSH Plate XX VT. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXIT., 1928. Pe ORE ee ee eee geen ee et aes PtP Web ge Ace een aepetend ore SEIS Pe MES Sete * BR eke de ee : ; oe ate eg OS NT Ke 3 Soe REDO ter ean ts ore igh Sotto : Set ects BA ee ky Re te at ~ ‘i ce en eso Roe ae Seg eae sm at CEE he HEI tytn Ee ee TIS ES TT AEP Reese! A oe iy Secchi HA od peas a ae. ig nete See ES ere & v ae Soe eet es eet Waters eee ke sc ethee ea Aa, fie oe aC a Seite yt he Ne Spee et: aH DECRERES 2 Ce aa Oe Seo Soe ON KS ‘ ¥ Sits ERR” Tey weet he Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LXII., 1928. Plate XXVIT. Oo: Che ee? ( r 9 Pe Gi v3 al pA aust Ne fe Sad ha ae HS be oe Se, : My eee Pood oa Dt ed ey 0; ee $e gant 243 Bes a cee: giOieles 3 OR HILAR eyes a ae ere nie ay ast é Oe” RR OE porn Pe ee St es SEC O28 ny ‘et res me Ly sac = wen EILEEN Se eA ee Bee CE Ia ee = — 73.9. The acetyl derivative was prepared by heating 1 gram of the purified glucoside with 10 grams of acetic anhydride and 2 grams of sodium acetate for 45 minutes. After allowing the mixture to cool, water was added and warmed on a water bath for 30 minutes to decompose excess of acetic anhy- dride; the acetyl derivative separated on cooling in small colourless needles, which after twice ecrystallising from dilute alcohol melted at 125°. 0.1255 gave 0.2578 CO. and 0.0617 H.O. C= 56.95 : H = 5.55. CusHi, (COCH,). NO: requires GO ='57,02 Eo 0.4146 dissolved in 50 e.e. absolute alcohol gave in a 2-dem. tube at 23° «, —0.89° whenee [vo]? = — 53.6. CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. 371 These figures agree with those obtained for sambunigrin, the glucoside of Sambucus nigra, and there can be no reason- able doubt as to the identity of the two. For comparison the constants of the two substances and their acetyl deri- ~vatives are set out below. The figures for acetyl-sambunigrin are those found for the synthetic product prepared by Emil Fischer and Berg- ‘mann.3 Sambunigrin Glucoside from A. glaucescens MEAEDOM .., ss ss 56.88 (a) 56.78 (b) 56.72 Hydrogen ... .. 5.83 (a) 5.81 (b) 5.80 ‘Optical Rotation .. [gq]15 — 76.3 [a]24 — 73.9 Melting Point .. Sinters at 149° Melts at 152° Melts at. 151°-152° Tetra-acetyl Sambunigrin Tetra-acetyl derivative of Glucoside from A. glaucescens ‘Optical Rotation.. [q]22 — 52.5 li@l23: == bar6 Melting Point .. >= 26° 125° Amount of HCN in Acacia glaucescens. In the table A are collected some figures showing the ‘amount of hydrocyanic acid present in this plant. It is too early to say what, if any, significance is attached to the distinct fall in the amount observed in the Spring. Acacia Cheelu, Blakeley. We have also isolated sambunigrin from Acacia Cheelu ‘by the process described above. Euphorbia drummondu, Boiss. Probably few plants in Australia have been the subject ‘of so much controversy as to their toxicity to stock as Euphorbia drummondi, the Milk Weed. Maiden‘ reviewing the available evidence stated that thousands of people -con- 3 Ber. d. d. chem. Ges. 1917, 50, 1047. 4 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1897, 8, 18. 372 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX. TABLE A. Amount of HCN in Acacia glaucascens (phyllodes.) o &D ae noe. m1 ,3°S ar 2a ll Siecle ee oo]! Reference! gource, | Date | Date |SESRISSES (833 5|8S2'5| Number. Collected | Received.i|, 2 adie, “Sila Bolazos & 0.9, (98 ROAD BSS ob a, ATS ar ane 1 eal bae=A 8 P.I. 1] Glenfield | Nov. ’27| Nov. ’27 0.22* Paleoe ip cae 27/3/28 | 62.5°| 0.12 | 0.82 | Not done Pol. 121 a Ase 7/6/28 | 45.0 | 0.20 | 0.37 sis PI. 199 és ay 18/7/28 | 49.8 | 0.21 | 0.42 | 9.41 P.1. 454 * 24/9/28 | 5/10/28 | 31.0 | 0.08 | 0.12 | 0.12 | *Determination not carried out until Jan., 1928. sidered it poisonous, and on the other hand quoted the opinion of the late Mr. Edward Stanley5, Chief Government Veterinarian of N.S.W., who, after a considerable number of experiments on sheep, failed to produce any poisonous symptoms whatever, and concluded that the reported deaths were due to indigestion or to diseases such as anthrax. In support of the view of the harmlessness of this plant is the: common experience of pastoralists of its use as fodder, constituting as it does in certain circumstances, the only food available. In such eases, sheep feeding on it in quan- tity are subject to the possibility of developing hoven: through gorging, just as may happen through the ingestion: of excessive amounts of any other harmless green crop. Other writers in later years have referred to the uncer- tainty regarding this plant and have stressed the real need for more exact data. In these circumstances the Poison Plants Committee of the C.S.1.R. decided to undertake its systematic collection and examination, particularly, in the first instance, for © 5 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1896, 7, 619. CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. ole hhydrocyanic,acid. Dr. H. R. Seddon, Director of Veterin- ary Research, arranged through his Stock Inspectors to collect samples from as wide an area of this State as pos- sible, and in order that there should be no possibility of loss of this volatile acid during transit to the laboratory, it was decided to have the fresh samples placed immediately after collection in bottles securely fastened with india- rubber stoppers. Dr. Seddon has already reported’ that one of these samples proved fatal when fed to a sheep, and the symptoms shown were those of prussic acid poisoning. The contents of the stomach were submitted to us by Dr. Seddon, and were found to contain hydrocyanic acid, as did the original speci- men of the plant after merely macerating with water, show- ing that it also contained the enzyme necessary for hydroly- sis of the cyanogenetie substance. In the original scheme of collection Dr. Seddon arranged to cover 35 areas coin- eiding with the same number of Pasture Protection Dis- tricts of N.S.W., and although during the past season we examined 113 specimens from these localities, from only one of these, viz., Brewarrina, which includes Bokhara, have we obtained samples containing hydrocyanic acid; in all, 11 positive specimens were collected. During the present season, however, positive samples have been obtained from Dubbo and Merriwa, so that as the area of collection is extended it may be found that the poisonous samples are not so limited in distribution as at first seemed to be the Case. The Brewarrina plants were collected between the 24th April and 28th July, 1928. Previous to the 7th June the eyanogenetic substance in the plant was associated with sufficient enzyme to ensure its decomposition when moist- ened with water, and differed in this respect from the four 6 Journ. C.S.I.R. 1928, 1, 268. 374 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX. species of Acacia mentioned above which contained little, if any, enzyme. Samples collected on 10th July, however, ° were found to be deficient in enzyme and only developed their total amount of hydrocyaniec acid after enzyme from. almonds had been added. The amount of hydrocyanic acid obtained from these 11 specimens varied between 0.041 and 0.103 per cent., or 2.8 to 7.2 grains per lb., of the air-dried material; particulars. are given in the following table. TABLE B. Amount of HCN Euphorbia Drummondi (whole plant) | digit oee, 48 oe Reference | Date Date |SEOb OZ Gao aa) oA as Nene Source. | Collected.| Received. LE aS ohh) 80.8 © op O85 elo Sale, el ay aed a8 a eee ote ea eeeee P I. 60 | Brewarrina | 24/4/28 | 27/4/28 | 61.0 | 0.038 | 0.085 |) {o) S+- 3 P.I. 61 | Bokhara i. » | 65.5 | 0.036 | 0.108 | 853 rae p, P.I. 96| Brewarrina | 8/5/28 | 24/5/28 | 23.5 | 0.066 | 0.086 REE j<=} q Heo P.I. 97 | Bokhara _ i 23.5 | 0.058 | 0.077 | J P.I. 138 | Brewarrina | 7/6/28 | 15/6/28 | 44.9 | 0.055 | 0.097 | 0.099* P.1. 139| Bokhara ‘ be 39.4 | 0.053 | 0.088 | 0.091* P.I.195| Bokhara _| 10/7/28 | 13/7/28 | 3.0 | 0.039 | 0.041 PT. 196| Brewarrina e 5% 21.8 | 0.046 | 0.059 *After drying for 386 days. The problem whether there is any ascertainable botanical difference between the samples containing hydrocyanie acid and those which do not is being undertaken by Dr. G. P. Darnell-Smith, who has kindly examined all the above specimens as to their identity. CYANOGENETIC GLUCOSIDES. 375 Goodia lotifolia, Salish. : _ In a series of Botanical Notes published in 1895 the late Mr. J. H. Maiden’ included a note entitled ‘‘Is Goodia poisonous to Stock?’’, and although he did not attempt to answer this question in the affirmative, he adduced evidence to show that the plant was under strong suspicion, but that Opinion was divided on the subject. Goodia is a genus of the Leguminosae, only two species of which, G. lotsfolia (Salisb.), syn. G. medicaginea and G. pubescens have been recorded. Indeed, the latter is thought by some botanists to be a pubescent form of the first. They are confined to Australia and occur as tall shrubs, the former growing to the size of a small tree and is the only one occurring in this State. In Tasmania it is known as the clover tree, from the similarity of its delicate leaves to clover. In Queensland its aboriginal name is Booroo-molie. Some of the foregoing particulars are due to Mr. Maiden, who gave an account of an enquiry from Bega respecting this shrub, known locally as the Indigo, the foliage of which was frequently fatal to stock traveling from Monaro to the coast. Large quantities at that time grew on the main road between Colombo and Nimitybelle. The same enquirer stated that cattle ate this plant greedily, and suffered from what was termed black scour—the tongue became black, the hide acquired a bluish tint and appeared rough and bound, the cattle became weak and emaciated, and eventually died. The form G. medicaginea has also been suspected in West Australia, twenty-five head of cattle dying from stoppage of the bowels. Another case of pois- oning occurred in South Australia, and a correspondent from Yorketown submitted to the Agricultural Bureau of 7 Agric. Gaz. N.S.W. 1895, 6, 306. 376 H. FINNEMORE AND C. B. COX. that State a specimen of a plant supposed to be poisonous, which was identified by the General Secretary of the Bureau as a species of Goodia and pronounced to be quite harmless. Mr. Maiden quotes the evidence of several South Aus- tralian observers who had fed this plant to animals without ill effect. Such were the conflicting views of the toxicity of the Goodias when a specimen of G. lotifolia gathered near Middle Harbour in August of this year, just before flowering, proved to be _ strongly cyanogenetic. Or That this Section desires to place on record its appre- ciation of the long and valuable services rendered by Mr. G. W. Card, A.R.S.M., as Curator of the Mining Museum over many years, to geological science in N.S.W. That the members desire to acknowledge gratefully their indebtedness to Mr. Card for so constantly sending exhibits to the meetings of the Section, thereby increasing very materially the interest and value of these meetings. That the Hon. Secretary be instructed to convey the foregoing resolutions to Mr. Card, with the cordial greetings and good wishes of the Section. EXHIBITS: . By Mr. Morrison: (a) Crystals of tantalite from Western Australia; (b) Perthite from Broken Hill; (¢c) Photo- graphs of prismatised sandstone occurring at the Giant’s Castle, Lane Cove, and in a quarry 14 miles south of Gordon. . By Dr. W. R. Browne: Specimens of decomposed Tertiary basalt from Wingello, N.S.W. These occur in association with basalt, and possess a characteristic violet colour, a feature recorded in connection with basalt in similar association in other parts of the world. By Mr. H. G. Raggatt: Specimen of analcite-dolerite from a sill of probable Tertiary age which intrudes the Upper Coal Measures at Broke, N.S.W. By Mr. C. A. Sussmilch: (a) Suite of specimens from the Albury district, comprising phyllites, schists, granite with schist inclusions, and pegmatite; (b) Granite from the Hume Reservoir Area. By Mr. A. J. Shearsby: Photographs of cylindrical econecretionary formation in the sandstone at Mosman. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXX1. A discussion upon ‘‘The Occurrence of Bands in Coal Seams, and their bearing on the origin of Coal, with special reference to the Neweastle Coal Field,’’ was opened by Mr. L. J. Jones. Mr. Jones described clearly the occurrence of well- defined bands in the Borehole Seam in the Newcastle- Wallsend district, emphasising the uniformity of thickness of the bands and the sharp boundaries existing between band and coal. He pointed out that the coal was cften laminated, and concluded that all the phenomena observed could be explained only by assuming the coal to have originated by deposition of plant-material transported from some source, the bands then being due to special variations in the conditions of deposition. Professor Browne commented upon the features which had been stressed by Mr. Jones, and thought the textural variation to be seen in the bands might be the result of the showering of tuff upon coal-measure swamps, but considered that careful microscopic examination was necessary before any conclusion could be reached. ; Messrs. Andrews, Harper, Morrison, Raggatt, Sussmilch and Osborne made brief contributions, and it was decided to continue the discussion at the next meeting. June 29, 1928. Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and thirteen members and three visitors were present. It was unanimously resolved to send a letter of sympathy to Mr. W. S. Dun on account of his severe illness. EXHIBITS: 1. By Dr. W. R. Browne: (a) Specimens of tuff from the Permo-Carboniferous marine beds at Twin Trig., near Tallong, N.S.W., and from Bundanoon; (b) Siderite in mamillary form with fibrous radial structure, from basalt, Lismore, N.S.W.; (¢) Specimen of common opal collected about 60 miles south of Dubbo. 2. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse: (a) Two specimens of opal- bearing jasperoid quartzite from Tallong; (b) Speci- mens of bismuth-ore from a contact zone between XXXII. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS granite and limestone, at Riddell’s Mine, Duckmaloi,. near Oberon, N.S.W. 3. By Mr. M. Morrison: Specimen of bright shale, not unlike: bitumen, which by analysis appears to be a high-grade eannel coal. Locality, Newnes, N.S.W.; (b) Coals with bands from the Clarence River Series (Mesozoic). 4. By Mr. H. F. Whitworth: Celestine occurring in the- gypsum beds cf Ivanhoe, N.S.W. 0. By Mr. Clark: Waterworn kerosene shale from Morna Point, also photographs of raised beach at same place.. 6. By Dr. A. B. Walkom: Two coal balls, of calcareous concretionary character, containing well - preserved plant-fossils, one ball from Belgium, and the other from. the Lancashire Coal Field; (b) Coorongite from Kangaroo I., S.A.; (c) Fossil plants from Yalwal.,. N.S.W., viz.: Protolepidodendron yalwalen:e, Proto- lepidodendron lineare, and Lepidodendron clarkei (?). The study of these confirmed the assigning, by Mr. Andrews, to the Yalwal beds of a Devonian age. 7. By Mr. G. D. Osborne: Specimens: of basalt and. basaltic pumice from the Toowoomba district. Also, in collaboration with Mr. Waterhouse, photographs of the Toowoomba Quarry, which has been reserved in the interests of science. The discussion commenced at the previous meeting was. continued. Mr. Harper described some of the features in the seams. of the Southern Coal Field, and concluded that these were: evidence of the accumulation of coaly material in swamps in which there were channels of drainage alternating with. sand bars built up by the wind. Dr. Browne reported having examined some of the mate- rial of the bands microscopically, but found it very difficult to make much out of the slides. He felt sure that if the coal were transported, then there would be a certain amount. of detrital material present in the coal. apart from the: distinct bands. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXlll.. Mr. Morrison reported the occurrence of a band in the: Western Coal Field, with a thickness of one inch, which was persistent over an area 50 miles in extent. Mr. Sussmilch said that the association of kerosene shale, which had developed im situ, with the coal seams was a point in favour of the “Growth-in situ” theory. Dr. Walkom thought the band referred to by Mr. Mor- rison could not have originated by any of the ordinary methods of mechanical sedimentation. He explained that the advanced decay of woody tissue of plants produced a. series of ulmins, leaving unaltered spores, etc. Thus in a deposit of coal produced by the accumulation of transported material, one would expect to find a smaller percentage of spores than in the case of the plants decomposing i situ, Mr. Waterhouse mentioned the vossibility of the bands: developing at times when conditions were special, caused by the incursion of the sea into the coal swamp areas. Professor Cotton, Messrs. Andrews, Poole, Whitworth, and Dr. Brennand also spoke briefly, and Mr. Jones replied to many points raised in the whole discussion. July 27, 1928. Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and eleven members and’ SI1x visitors were present. The Chairman welcomed Mr. Letchworth English, Mineralogist from the F. A. Ward Foundation of Natural Science in the University of Rochester, U.S.A. 1. EXHIBITS: By Mr. M. Morrison: (a) Spotted and banded sedi-. mentary rock from Kimberley, W.A.; (b) Crystal of rhodonite, in association with sulphide ore, from Broken: Hill, N.S.W. . By Mr. H. G. Raggatt: Schists, probably andalusite- bearing, from Anembo, 15 miles south of Captain’s. Flat, N.S.W. . By Dr. A. B. Walkom: (a) Specimens of Lepidodendron collected by Dr. Woolnough from 65 miles south of: Bermagui. These have affinities with Protolepidodendron and may be from an extension of the Yalwal beds ;, XXXIV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. (b) Small branch of Lepidodendron with leaves attached, collected by Mr. Sussmilch, at Arden Hall, Upper Hunter District, N.S.W.; (¢) Specimen of un- usual Lepidodendron from the Karuah River District. 4. By Mr. G. D. Osborne: Conularia from the Upper Marine Series at Branxton, N.S.W. Assistant-Professor Browne opened a discussion on ““Tertiary Igneous Activity in N.S.W.’’ DISCUSSION : Dr. Browne dealt with the rocks in a comprehensive review, discussing their distribution, petrology and tectonic relationships, and instituted comparisons and contrasts with Tertiary rocks in other parts of Australia and elsewhere. He pointed out that there was a wide area covered by the rocks, which occurred as extrusions and intrusions, showing a great variety of type. Thus there were rocks ranging from ultrabasic to acid, with much variation in texture. The basalts are all olivine-bearing, and nearly all contain analcite, or nepheline or a zeolite. They are distinctly alkaline, the intrusions being, in general, more alkaline than the extrusions. The silica percentage ranges from 38 per cent. to 74 per cent., reaching the latter figure in the rhyolites. A consideration of the norms of the analysed rocks showed that only four of the basalts were ealcic. Some of the intrusive masses are members of the quartz- dolerite group. The basalts are not related closely to the Plateau basalts, in the sense given to that term by Washington. The relations of the N.S.W. rocks to the Tertiary igneous rocks of Victoria and of Queensland are not very well known. The absence of major intrusions does not imply neces- sarily that such do not exist at deeper levels of the crust. Mr. C. A. Sussmilch pointed out that on physiographic grounds the strongly alkaline lavas were to be considered younger than the two main groups of basic lavas. Professor Cotton spoke regarding the relationshiv be- tween the distribution of the Tertiary lavas and the tectonic structures of the eastern margin of the continent, particularly between Central Eastern Queensland and South-eastern New South Wales. He also referred to some Tertiary necks in the New England district. Mr. Osborne discussed the relations between the trends of the dykes and the directions of jointing and faulting in the Sydney-Blue Mountains region. ‘The discussion was then adjourned till the next meeting. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXV. August 31, 1928. Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and eight members and one visitor were present. EXHIBITS: 1. By Mr. T. Hodge Smith: (a) Lithiophilite, a phosphate of lithium and manganese; also a new mineral, hydro- thorite, a hydrous silicate of thorium, and in addition the caesium-beryl, vorobyevite: locality, Wodgina, W.A. (b) Galena with hedenbergite, from Broken Hill. The discussion on ‘‘ Tertiary Igneous Activity in N.S.W.’’ was continued. Dr. Walkom pointed out that the division of the basalts into “Older” and ‘“‘Newer” received no support from a consideration of the floras of the “deep leads.” He also drew attention to the occurrence of the alkaline masses of the Glass House Mountains, to the east of the main line of uplift in Eastern Australia. Mr. Smith referred to the Kyogle district where the volcanic succession seemed to fit in with Prof. Richards’ classification of the Queensland flows. He also suggested correlation of some of the Tertiary flows by means of the deuteric minerals present. Mr. Andrews drew attention to the relations between the distribution. of the flows and the margins of the old stable blocks of Palaeozoic rocks. It seemed as if the leucite lavas were poured out on the old blocks while folding around the margin of these went on, and while the areas of crumpling were characterised by volcanic vents giving forth ash and lava. The plateau basalts flooded the old stable blocks. Professor Browne replied to many points raised, and short contributions were made by Prof. Cotton and Mr. Poole. September 28, 1928. Mr. Andrews was in the chair, and ten members and two visitors were present. The Secretary announced a proposed excursion to Norton’s Basin on Saturday, October 20th, 1928. 0,0, cil ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. EXHIBITS: 1. By Sir Edgeworth David: Casts of Eurypterid remains from the Adelaide (Lipalian) Series of Pre-Cambrian age, The remains were of the nature of claws and spines, probably representatives of the Merostomata. 2. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse: A series of specimens from the Bald Hills, Cathurst, illustrating the occurrence of flows of basalt overlying Tertiary drift, which in turn lies on decomposed granite, the last-named no doubt having been weathered in Tertiary times. 3. By Mr. G. D. Osborne:_(a). Specimens of yoleanie ime from the Narrabeen Series at Long Reef, N.S.W.; (b) Specimens of sandstone, altered sandstone with much coaly material, and sandstone with pronounced slickensides, from the neighbourhood of the Basin voleanie rock, Nepean River. Professor L. A. Cotton addressed the section on “‘ Causes of Diastrophism and their Status in Current Geological Thought.”’ This lecture was along the lines of the Presidential Address delivered by Professor Cotton to Section) C of the A.A.A.S. at the Hobart (1928) Meeting, which address has been published in the report of that meeting, pp. 171- 218. The address was discussed by Sir Edgeworth David and Mr. Osborne, and a reply made by Dr. Cotton. October 26, 1928, Mr. Andrews was In the chair, and nine members were present. A letter from Mr. G. W. Card returning thamicemamadl greetings for the letter conveying the resolutions of May 18, was read. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVI, The Secretary reported that a very successful excursion had been held on Saturday, October 20, to the Basin, near Mulgoa. About thirty-five members and friends attended, and the trip was made in cars kindly made avaiable by some of the members. The physiography. and general geology of the very interesting region near the Basin were studied. NOTES AND EXHIBITS: Mr. Andrews gave a brief report upon a recent trip which he and the members of the Artesian Water Con- ference had taken in the Broken Hill-Grey Range-Tibboo- burra region. He exhibited many specimens to illustrate his remarks, including a scratched boulder from (?) Lower Cretaceous Glacial beds. 2. By Sir Edgeworth David: Casts of appendages of EKurypterids from limestone in the Adelaide Series. Also, on behalf of Miss D. R. Taylor: (a) Crustacean remains from the Carboniferous Calciferous sandstone of Gullane, Scotland; (b) Beautifully preserved ammonite from the Oolite of Radstock, England. 3. By Mr. Poole: Panoramic photographs of the Basin Area, Nepean River, showing features examined on the excursion held on October 20. 4. By Mr. Osborne: (a) Crystal of quartz, showing ‘*shadow-erystal’’ nucleus; (b) Composite crystal of quartz showing successive growth-zones; (¢) Coral sand- rock from Norfolk Island sent by Mr. Card. A committee consisting of Prof. Cotton, Dr. Walkom and Messrs. Dun and Shearsby was appointed to enquire into the matter of the delay in the reservation of the Hatton’s Corner site. PAPERS: Two papers of mineralogical interest from current literature were presented in abstract, as follows: XXXVIIL. _ ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. ' 1. “‘The Geology of the Platinum Metals,’’ by J. H. L. Vogt. Presented in abstract by Mr. G. D. Osborne, and discussed by Sir Edgeworth David and Mr. Andrews. 2. “‘The Natural History of the Silica Minerals,’’ by Austin F. Rogers. Presented by Mr. T. Hodge Smith and discussed by Sir Edgeworth David and Mr. Osborne. November 30, 1928. Mr. Andrews was in the chair and eight members and. two visitors were present. The Chairman referred to the sudden death of Mr. R. H. Cambage, which had occurred three days previously, and the following resolution was carried in silence: “That the members of the Geological Section desire to record their deep sense of the loss sustained by the death of their beloved friend and colleague, Mr. R. H. Cambage, and extend to the bereaved relatives their heartfelt sympathy.” A cordial welcome was extended to Mr. F. G. Forman, of Western Australia, who exhibited two samples of natural oil obtained by him from seepages in the Kerema District, Gulf Division, Papua. Mr. E. C. Andrews initiated a discussion upon ‘‘ The Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion.’’ He gave a brief summary of the outstanding features of the earth’s surface as a foundation for an enquiry into the relation of intrusions and extrusions of magma through the earth’s crust. He drew attention to the lines of mountain ranges on the earth and their relation to vol- canoes and bathylites. Mr. Andrews considered that the mountain belts were essentially geanticlinal units in a series of earth undulations or waves, and explained his view of the migration of magma during the activity of these undulations. He believed that the intrusive igneous rocks came into their places of crystallisation by a process akin to “sweating” through the country rocks. He stressed the ~~ ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXIX. facts that most intrusions showed no feeders, and he thought that the characteristics of form and origin of ore bodies could be a guide to the study of intrusives. Dr. Browne did not see eye to eye with the Chairman in regard to the matter of the analogy between ore bodies and igneous masses. He considered that the former were very specialised units whose behaviour was probably quite > different from that of bathylites. He found difficulty in understanding the mechanism of the undulations or waves which Mr. Andrews had! described. Mr. Osborne gave a separate contribution to the discus- sion by presenting a summary of the views of some of the geologists of the British Survey regarding the “cauldron-subsidence” phenomena to be observed at Glencoe and in N.E. Ireland. Mr. Andrews replied to some points raised, and the dis- cussion was adjourned until the next meeting. Aa—December 5, 1928. SECTION OF INDUSTRY. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION. OF INDUSTRY. Officers—Chairman: A. D. Olle, F.C.8.; Honorary Secretary: H. V. Bettley-Cooke. As in 1927, the activities of the Section consisted of visits to industrial establishments. In all cases manufacturers gave a cordial welcome to members and went to considerable trouble in explaining their processes and in preparing exhibits. The following visits were paid :— May 15th, 1928—British-Australian Lead Manufacturer’s Works, Cabarita. June 19th, 1928—Goodyear Tyre and Rubber Co. (Aus- tralia) Ltd. July 17th, 1928—Nestle’s Chocolate Factory, Abbotsford. August 21st, 1928—General Motors (Australia) Pty. Ltd., Marrickville. September 18th, 1928—Australian Glass Manufacturers Co. Ltd., Dowling Street, Waterloo. October 9th, 1928—Messrs. Elliott Bros. Chemical Works, Balmain. November 27th, 1928—Messrs. Parke Davis & Company Works, Rosebery. December 11th, 1928—Sydney Harbour Trust Operations on the Harbour. Billy eka SECTION OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE, iA m . : ' oe A lh P fe NX ’ . i ; as ee - * . i =, j ! x 2 iY | 5 : é ft e . eter Lae - os! ye ig ) \ = so < ' ‘ Gilet pacha yameityste - Rae : : ( ; : —s ' ie f < j : : 4 l y ay 7 a P:. ‘te pee ai eee water ve Rene + ion okey domme a ial ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION OF PHYSICAL» SCIENCE. Seven meetings were held during the year. The average attendance was fifteen. At the May meeting the following officers were elected: Chairman—Assoe. Professor Wellish, M.A. Honorary Secretary—G. H. Briggs, B.Se., Ph.D., F.Inst.P. Committee—Associate Professor Bailey, M.A., Ph.D., Bainsie., Major KE. Ey Booth, MC Be. F .Inst.P., Professor Madsen, D.Sec., Rev. Mather Pivot. -S.J., Boal) MB. Mra Je I Richardson, A.M.I.E.E., Professor Vonwiller, Bec, Ho linstie: April 18th, 1927. Professor Bailey in the chair. Mr. J. C. Jaeger read a paper on ‘‘The Motion of Electrons in Pentane.’’ A sketch of the theory and experimental procedure involved in Professor Bailey’s original 3-slit apparatus was given. In the work on pentane, readings were taken in this apparatus at values of z/p of 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40 for the determination of / and a. Experiments were then made at the same values of z/p in a Townsend diffusion apparatus for the determination of W. The values of a are low and decrease with increasing z/p as in air, and the probability h shows a similar rapid decrease at low values of z/p. The k, z/p curve is nearly linear and of compara- XI Vitt:. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. tively small slope, while the values of W show a rapid initial rise. These peculiarities cause a maximum of Xd at a low value of z/p. The same effect is shown by the other polyatomic gases yet investigated CO., NO. and C.H,, to the last of which pentane is specially similar. It was suggested that this effect is connected with the formation of ions. Mr. J. D. McGee, M.Sc., read a paper on ‘*The Attach- ment of Electrons to Molecules of Ammonia.’’ An outline of the theory of a three slit apparatus designed by Professor Bailey was given. In this apparatus the distance between the plates can be varied from 2 to 4 ems. Experiments with ammonia were made in order to check the previous work of Professor Bailey and Mr. Higgs using the older apparatus. Hydrogen was found in the gas which they had used. With a fresh supply of pure ammonia observations were made from z/p = 7 to z/p = 82: and the values of a and k determined. It was found that k& increased very.rapidly from k = 3 at z/p = 7 tok — 60 at z/p == 14. Over the same range a/p also increased rapidly from 0.006 to 0.125. From these results it was deduced that unless the drift velocity of the electrons decreased rapidly over this range, the probability of the attachment of an electron to a molecule of ammonia must increase over this range. Hence it appears that the probability of attachment is not in- dependent of the velocity of the electron as was assumed by Loeb. May 16th, 1927. Professor Wellish in the chair. An address was given by Professor Madsen, D.Se. He discussed— ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. x]ix.. (1) the research in wireless being carried out in Great Britain by the Radio Research Board; (2) work on geophysical prospecting by Eve, Edge and Bieler, and (3) legal definitions of standards in various countries. Professor V. A. Bailey, M.A., Ph.D., F.Inst.P., described a rapid method for determining the pulsation © and damping coefficient of free oscillations in any electric net- work containing inductanees, resistances and capacities. At any part of the network ‘an alternating sinoidal e.m.f. of pulsation w and zero amplitude is introduced and the equations for the currents in different parts of the network are written down with the assistance of Kirchhoff’s rules, but replacing the operator d/dt by wj as in the method of complex operators. The condition that these currents be different from zero, as they must in the ease of free oscillations, is equivalent to an equation A (wj) = 0 where J is the determinant formed by the coefficients of the currents in the above equations. Each root w of this equation then gives the & and pu of one of the free oscillations through the relation w= 2 + pj. In many special eases the above process is equivalent to either of the following :— (1) If the network can be regarded as a single eireuit with impedence operator z; then the equation in w will be 2 = 0. (2) If the admittance operator y between any two points in the network can be determined the equation in w will be given by y = 0. The use and value of the method was illustrated by application to several standard cases. 4, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, June 20th. Professor Wellish in the chair. Major E. H. Booth, B.Se., F.Inst.P., gave an address on ““Geophysical Methods of Prospecting.’’ July 18th. Professor Wellish in the chair. Mrs. G. H. Briggs gave an address on ‘‘ Recent Develop- ments of Quantum Theory.’’ September 19th. Professor Wellish in the chair. Mr. W. G. Baker, B.Sc., B.E., read a paper on ‘‘ Radio Broadcast Transmission in the Neighbourhood of Sydney.’’ Measurements of signal strength were made by L. 8. C. Tippett, B.Sc., B.E., and W. G. Baker, BSc, Baby receiving the signals on a loop interval tuned by a variable condenser. The voltage in the loop was measured by a Moulin type thermionic voltmeter. The observations were restricted to a distance of about 20 miles from the station 2FC and were made along seven directions radiating from the station, open spaces being chosen at each point. The results, illustrated by a polar diagram, show in general a much more rapid fall off to the north, over the wooded country, than to the south. The absorption co- efficient was measured in each direction and by making use of Sommerfeld’s theory the conductivity of the ground was deduced. By integrating the power radiated over a hemisphere and taking into account the absorption it was deduced that 82% of the 5000 watts input to the station is radiated. October 17th. The business of the meeting was a demonstvation of experiments with diodes and triodes by Professor Bailey. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. le In an introductory address Professor Bailey outlined the methods and theory of the maintenance of oscillations by valves and also the rectification of alternating current. The experiments shown were— (1) A triode oscillating simultaneously at a high and a low frequency. The former oscillation being shown by a neon lamp while the audible frequency of oscillation was altered by a variable mutual inductance. (2) A short wave oscillator producing waves of about 3 meters wave length. (3) A tuning fork maintained in vibration by a 3 electrode valve, telephone electro-magnets in the plate and grid circuit being placed on either side of the prongs of the fork. (4) High frequency induction furnace consisting of a — eoil of thick copper wire of about 20 turns and 4 em. diameter through which high frequency oscillations pass. A piece of iron rapidly became red hot when held in the coil. The same oscillating system was used to show electrodeless discharges. in vacuum tubes. (5) Short waves were set up on a Lecher system, the wave length being about 5 to 10 metres, and an application to ‘the calibration of a wavemeter by counting beats between the harmonies was de- seribed. The experiments were illustrated by diagrams of the electrical circuits and were greatly appreciated. November 21st, 1927. Professor Wellish in the chair. Mr. R. W. J. Mackay, B.Sc., B.E., gave an address on ‘* Electrica! Relays.”’ INDEX. A Page Page Abstract of Proceedings i-xxvi | Andrews, E. C., Awarded the Geology oe se) XR VIIR-XL Clarke Memorial Medal ... xiii Industry... ... xli-xlvi | Animal Diseases, ‘I'he Control of 53 Physical Science ... xlvi.li} Annual Dinner ... es. x Acacia alata sah aa. we 159 Financial Statement FU hg argentea bec Lae 229 LOL Report of the Council .. viii bipinnatae ... Dee ... 162 | Anobium domesticum ... .. 3853 caesiella itd dae ... 154} Apothecia .., 135 calamiformes st ... 153 | Application of Science ‘to the Cambagei... us log Sheep Industry _... pra centaurer ... oe ... 153 | Asct ar Ae ain ... 136 Cheelit ER ... 869,371 | Ascospores Abe 43 i wlSe .confusa 5a ee ... 158 | Atherosperma . . 350 Cunninghanit pen i OOO moschatum, Labillardiere .. 352 decurrens x. .. 163,165 | Atmospheric Effecton Flow from Description of one New Springs at Kosciusko hedeal (S76 Species of... i -« 201 at Mittagong ... 198 doratoxylon ... ... 009 |} Australasian Association for the epilobium ... Sic ... 153 Advancement of Science ... 13 ericifolia ... oe ... 153 | Australian National Research Farnesiana ... ee ... 152 Council 13 glaucescens ... .. 869,371 | Australian Timbers of the Mon- graveolens ... va ue Loe imiacez, Notes on Some .,. 359 gummiferae ... Ree ... 164 harpophylla ... 7 ame Oy B homalophylla Ae ... 155 | Bacillus atterimus ee we O44 horrida <7 wwe > 16-4, 165 ellenbachiensis a we. 844 juliflorae... ee o. 209 graveolens ... mia oe B44 linophylla ... ma sar 160 megatherium... be wee B44 Lucasii n. sp. a ... 215 mucor . A me . 845 lysimachia ... as ... 153 mycoides ne he .. B44 melanoxylon ... ae si. LOZ NAGE 0 dae ee ... B44 merinthophora ade 159 ruminatus ... .. 847, 348 Mollissima ... ar 162, 164 subtilis ine a we 344 plurinerves ... sup .. 155 vulgatus .. 844 podalyriaefolia ts ... 216 | Backhousia angustifolia. .. w. 231 racemosae ... wile ways LO myrtifolia ... % woe 2O4 rubida Xxill. | Banksia Latifolia Ws lad Seedlings, Part XIII. ... 152 | Barr, Robert Houston ..., cae uninerves... 5 . 154] Blakely. W. FE. Address, Brecidentil by or. Description of Three New Douglas Stewart ... nis aati Species of Ee and Aerobacter cloacae 34.4 One Acacia ... . 201 Alkalization and other Deuteric Booroo-molie Se: .. 875 Phenomena in the Saddle- Boronia anemonifolia 362, 264, back aaa at Port 290, 291, 292, 294 Kembla sis . 303 var. anethifolius ... 296 Anaspidacea aie oo woe COU var. dentigera ... ... 801 antiquus 686 cee jc. 108 var. variablis ... was 20a Anaspides .. ... 866 anethifolia .. 290, 294, 295 tasmaniae (Thomson) 24 Od bipinnata 290, 294, 295, 296 Andesite ... ee bite ace tne, var, citriodora... we. 300 INDEX, Page | Boronia citriodora 290, 294, 299, #00 dentigera 268, 290, 291, 294, 301 dentigeroides 264, 265, 290, 294, 301 falcifolia 290, 296, 299 Further Notes on the Genus 290 Gunnit 290, 294 hispida 2» 298 Muelleri 226, 232 Nand ... 290, 298 apmositifolia .. Perer4o sc) palerfolia . 299 pilosa... 294 pinnata "295, 226, 207, 294, var. citriodora .. . 200 polygalifolia... a joe var. anemonifolia . 294 var. pinnatifolia . 294 var. robusta pare 4576 var. ternatifolia 4 2OW var. trifoliolata 1298" Rich in Ocimene, The Es- sential Oil of a New Species of Anemone Leaf . 268 rigens... 290, 297 safrolifera .. 227 tetrandra .. 293 var. grandiflora tee OO tetrathecoides ‘av 297 trifoliata : ... 290 thujona e220 226,221, 232 variabilis 290, 295 Brady, Andrew John ... 4 Brown Rot of Fruits, and Dssoc- lated Diseases, in Australia 99 Browne, W. kK. On Some Aspects of Different- ial Erosion ... 2723 On the Probable Tertiary Ace of Certain New South Wales Sedentary Soils... 251 Browne, W.R.,and H. P. White Alkalization and Other Deu- teric Phenomena in the Saddleback Trachybasalt at Port Kembla ... 803 Burfitt Prize Walter 12, She efi Burindi Series (179 Cc Cambage, R, H. 14, xv, xxlv Acacia Seedlings. Part XIII. 152 The Outbreak of sigere in Autumn , dehy lice Cape, Alfred John hohe eh Centaurer .. . 158 ‘Chemistry of the lili. Page Cheel, Edwin as 290 Further Notes on the Genus Boronia . 290 Chemical Analysis of the Essen- tial Oils. The occurrence of a number of varieties of Eucalyptus dives as deter- mined by was NS Exudation from the Wood of Pentas- podon Motleyt, The... ere: Chilton, Chas. Note on a Fossil Shrimp from the Hawkesbury Sandstones 366 Clark, Wm., W. A. Greig and C. A. Sussmilch The Geology of Port Stephens 168 Clarke Memorial Medal 13 Conglomerates 179 Conidia ; 137 Control of Animal Diseases 53 Control of Drought 24, Control of Pests... 52 Conularia .. XXXIV: Cook, Bi- -Centenary of Captain James ar eRe Xa Cox, C. B. and H. Uiinneuinee Cyanogenetic Glucosides in Australian Plants ... 369 Cyanogenetic Glucosides in Aus- tralian Plants «a7 O09 Cynanothannus tridactylites ... 292 D Daphnandra aromatica, Bailey... 357 micrantha, Bentham .. oo repandula, F. v. Mueller ... 356 Defective Oregon (Pseudotsuga taxifolia), An Examination of siete 232 Description of Three New Spec- ies of Eucalyptus and One Acacia 201 Differential Erosion, Some Ase pects of ev 2S Diospyros kaki . 122 Disease of Passion Fruit, Some observations on the Woodi- ness or Bullet eS) Diseases in Australia, eown Rot of Fruits and associated 99 Doryphora sassafras, Enilicher 350 E Edge A. Broughton xv Encouragement of Research 56 liv. INDEX. Page Page English, G. W. xviii | Fodder Production and Conserv- _ Epilobium = . 153 ation . 26. Erosion-Scarps ... . 274 | Fossil Shrimp from the Hawkes- Erosion, On some aspects of differential i Hee PATER: Essential Oil from a Eorouia in the Pinnate Section ... 225 of a New Species of Anem- one Leat Boronia Rich in Ocimene, The Tbe occurrence of a number of varieties uf Eucalyptus dives as determined by chemical analysis of the 72 263 Eucalyptus acmenioides... 211, 212 anomala n. sp. 209, 211 Australiana hci TALE Bott .. ... 2075-208 Consideniana 208, 205, 206, 208 corymbosa : ... 204 corynocalyx .. 377 Description of three New Species of =. 201 dives .. (ay 74, 15,11, 15 dives as determined by chemical analysis of the Essential Oils 72 eugeniordes ... i Jeo de haemastoma 201, 203, 204, 206, 207, 210, 211, 212 Joyceae n. sp. 201, 203. 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 211, 212 micrantha 201, 203, 204 Muelleriana ... vole nigra ... hoo pilularis w. 214 piperita 203, 207 punctata abril resinifera ... 204 robusta ee ral Sieberrana 204, 206 stricta . 205 umbra ae 210 212 Ward n. sp. 212, 214 Eucarya spicata ... 64, 69 Euphorbia drummondi, Boiss ... 371 Facilities for Transportation ... 38 Fault-Line Scarps . 275 Fault-Scarps and Erosion-Scarps 274 Fereuson, Eustace William ... 5 Finnemore, H. and C, B. Cox Cyanogenetic Glucosides in Australian Plants ... . 869 bury Sandstones. Note on a 366 Fusanus spicatus ... 64: G Geology of Port Stephens, The 168 Gloeosporium fructigenum . 85 Glucoside, Extraction of the ... 868 Goodia lotifolia, Salisb ... 375, 376 medicaginea ... . 875 pubescens . 375: Greig, W..A,, C. A. Sussmilch and Wm. "Clark The Geology of Port Stephens 168 Greig-Smith, Robert... .. 0,6 H Hargrave, Lawrence xx Harrison, Launcelot te 7 Harrison, T’. H. Brown Rot of Fruits and As- sociated Diseases, in Aus- tralia .. 99 Hedycarya gnoustifolia, ae Cun: ningham ... 360 Heterodendron olecfolia... . 376 Hypochaeris radicata . 149 Improved Animal Nutrition 39 K Keele, Thomas William eS Kabora ( .. : . 362 Krahmann, Rudolf bas sot ipa L Lepidodendron clarke XXxiil. Leptospermum Liversidget same Liversidge, Archibald ... 8, 9, 10 Medals of the late... . xxl Research Lectureship ; Vili, X, xxi Lysimachia wo. 153 MM MacDonald, Ebenezer ... se LOWS Maiden Memorial re 12, xiii Medal, Clarke Memorial eaale Melaleuca leucadendron .. 4 Members, List of (IX) Merostomata XXXVI. Microconidia , 189) INDEX. lv, Page Page Mollinedia ae alta Tulasne 359 Penfold, A. R. Monilia. ... spot a) The Chemistry of Western cinerea ae mi eee? Australian Sandalwood Oil, f. pruni ... sated UP Part I. = po kon) fructigena 108, 112, 114, 115 118, 120, 121, 122, 128, 124, 125 Monimiacee ... 800 Monthly Meetings of the Royal Society of N.S.W xvi Morrison, F. R. and A. R. Penfold The Chemistry of the Exud- ation from the Wood of Pentaspodon Motleyi .. 218 The occurrence of a number of varieties of Eucalyptus dives as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential Oils. Part II.... 72 N Noble, R. J. Some observations on the W oodiness or Bullet Disease of Passion Fruit an Neocalamites nes Hb xxix. oO Obituary— Barr, Robert Houston 4 Brady, Andrew John 4 Cape, Alfred Cape.. : 4 Ferguson, Esutace Woltiawn 5 Greig-Smith, Robert 5,6 Harrison, Launcelot Oa Keele, Thomas William Ths to Liversidge, Archibald MacDonald, Ebenezer 0) Scammell, William Joseph 10 Taylor, George mis ee 11 Taylor, James fe 1] Welch, William as Sh, 12 Outbreak of Springs in Autumn 179 Officers for 1928-29 aes 30 ce XL, Oregon, An examination of de- fective . 235 Oil, The Chemistry of Western Australian Sandalwood ... 60 Oils, Oxidation of Crude meOt P Paraphyses hi ae eral ost Passion Fruit, Some _ observ- ations on the Woodiness or Bullet Disease of ... Wi at Passiflora coerulea deh se OS edulis... me a 7Y, 88 The Essential “Oil ‘from a Boronia in the Pinnate Sec- tion. From Frazer Island, Queensland .. 225 The Essential Oil of a New Species of Anemone Leaf Boronia Rich in Ocimene... 263 Penfold, A. R. and F.R. Morrison The Chemistry of the Exud- ation from the Wood of Pentaspodon Motleyi #. 218 The occurrence of a number of varieties of Eucalyptus dives as determined by Chemical Analysis of the Essential Oils. PartII.... 72 Pentalonia nigrovenosa ... wee Oe Pentaspodon Motleyi ... oo LS Pests, the Control of ... aa lay? Petrography ah : ..s 168 Physiography and Genera! Ge- ology of Port Stephens 168 Popular Science Lectures ‘ix, XV Poranthera corymbosa ie Oud microphylla ... ay soe Presidential Address by J. Douglas Stewart... ae a Protolepidodendron lineare XXXlll. yalwalense ae XXXiil. Prunus chinensis ... ie ... 103 persica es se ERO Pseudotsuga Douglasii se ... 285 taxifolia Bas oe ... 285 R Ranken, T., Tables of Metrology and of Ancient Weights and Measures _... x1x Research, Encouragement of ... 56 Rhacopteris a oe aaa (Anemites) inequilatera .. 180 Rhizoids ... wes ... 186 Rhyolite ... at Bag. es Royal Society’s House ... Seah. Rule 36 xviii, xx Russell, Sir John a iV s Sale of Royal Society’s House... ix Sambucus nigra .. . 871 Sandalwood Oil, The Chemistry of Western Australian ...69) lvi. INDEX. Page : Page: Santalum album ... . 64) Taylor, George Augustine 11 cygnorum... ... 64] Taylor, James... NOT fc lanceolatum .. 63, 64, 69, 70 | Tertiary Age of Certain New spicatum sy. .. 64 South Wales Sedentary Soils 251 Scammell, William J oseph 10 | The Chemistry of Western Aus- Science House ... ix tralian Sandalwood Oil 60° Science House, Exhibit ‘of the Thrips tabaci its ave 92 Prize Design ..xxv1 | Tomato Pulp, Notes on some Sclerotinia 113, 115, 116, 130, 141 Organisms of . B41 aestivalis 133, 184, 140 | Toscanite ... . 174 Americana .. 112, 114, 125, Torula fructigena eid V2: 127, 128, 129, 142 | Trachybasalt at Port Kembla, apothecia 140 Alkalisation and other Deu- Australian ... 127, 128, 186 teric Phenomena in the cinerea 112-118, 121-125, 128 Saddleback ... vo 803: 181, 138, 189, 142, 144, 145 forma Americania . 118 forma mali peel V forma prunt .. 112} Variability in Physiographic fructicola 112-114, 129- 131, Behaviour of Rock-Masses 279 134, 186, 137, 140, 141, 144, 145 fructigena 112-117 merea . 112 Ww Sedimentary Rocks . 178 | Walter Burfitt Prize Xili, xviii Sesquiterpenes, Distinction be- tween Australian and Hast Indian Oils by means of Colour Reaction of . 70 Sheep Industry,The Application of Science to the epg leh Shoshonose : ne eal Smith, Grafton, Elliot . = i Soils, On the Probable Tertiary Age of Certain New South Wales Sedentary i251. Springs in Autumn, Outbreak of 192 Stewart. J. Douglas Presidential Address.. ti Sussmilch, C. A., Wm. Clarkand W.A. Greig The Geology of Port Stephens 168 T Tables of Metrology and of An- cient Weightsand Measures xix Water Supply and Conservation 31 Weather Forecasting 37 Welch, M. B. An Examination of Defective Oregon Pseudotsugataxifolia 235. Notes on Some Australian Timbers of the Monimiaceze Welch, William . White, H. P. and W. Re ‘Browne Alkalization and other Deu- teric Phenomena in the Saddleback Rai ekiesil. at Port Kembla ‘°... 2. 303: Windred, G. L. Notes on Some Organisms oe Tomato Pulp aa Woodiness or Bullet Disease of Passion Fruit. Some ob- servations on bie Wool Production yen wale 300: if: 34] SYDNEY : Frep. W. WuHitTe, PRINTER, 344 Kent STREET. 1929. CONTENTS, é Pace . XIV.—The Essential Oil of a new species of Anemone leaf _- Boronia, Rich in Ocimene. By A. BR. Punroup, F.A.C.L.,_ F.C.S. (Issued February 12th, 1929.) oe ww. 263 ArT. XV.—On some Aspects of Differential Erosion. By W. R. . Browns, D.Sc. Wek = teat pee ——s gale 19th, 1929.)... ; 273 Art. XVI.—Further sakes on the Banna Bor onia. By B, Giant: Be, (Issued February 19th, 1929.) ... Be i wes ae Art. XVII.—Alkalization and other Deuteric oe in the _ Saddleback Trachybasalt at Port Kembla. By W. R. Browne. D.Sc. and H. P. Warts, F.C.S. [With Plates XXIV, XXV and two text Paes J tiesved pees 19th, 1929.) ae 303 Art. XVIII.—Notes on some igshine of Tost Pulp. By G. L. WInpRED, (communicated 2 Gilbert een): Piro (Issued February 19th, 1929.) —... a 341 . XLX.—Notes on some Australian Timbers of the Monimiaceae. By M. B. Wetcu, B.Sc., A.LC. [With Plates se Sie ne feaned February 19th, 1929, Sauer wn in vet 350 Arr, XX.—Note on a Fossil Shrimp from the Hawkesbury Sand: stones. By CHaruss Cuitton, M.A., D.Sc.,-M.B., (com- municated by W. S. Dun). [With Plate XXX. | Cssued February 19th, 1929.) ... — 366 Arr. XXI.—Cyanogenetic Glucosides in becieaien Pints By H. Finnemwore, B.Sc.,.and C. B. se B.Sc. (Issued March Me Lut + ONG ae ar Wa PDF is pie p Si eli Ss; Nk eee ; » f $ prez uy n ns x Sea oea, 2 ‘ } ‘ “7 bid: eit a 7a, eset By te ag “4 es ; t , ; r Port Mae a3, Pay a ‘ i j i os et Se dies Bail bh ss CARL A | 19th, 1929.)... ee < re = ae we 0369 ___ AssTRact or Procezpines = > os Re a ee : PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION .., a XXV1. — XXXIX. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SeEcTION oF INDUSTRY ce aa xl. - xli, - PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION OF PHyYsICAL SCIENCE oie xlv. —li. _- Trrity Pace, Contents, Notices, PUBLICATIONS, ... wo ee vB) OFFICERS FOR 1928-1929) 5 ae Pare ee oe wee (vii.) List or Mempers, &c. ... tag cS chs ae ee Romes 95 | InpEx To Voutume LXII. ee, ae ey ae ore gh bs S PEN Re ee amy Se s STITUTION LIBRARIES tlh il 2 Seer re Pe ate ree ae a